Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 364

INSTRUCTIONS Labels and Symbols 1

Important Information — Please Read Before


Use 3

Summary of Equipment Functions 14

VISERA ELITE VIDEO SYSTEM CENTER


Chapter 1 Checking the Package Contents 17

OLYMPUS OTV-S190
Chapter 2 Nomenclature and Functions 19

Chapter 3 Installation and Connection 35

Chapter 4 Function setup 71

Chapter 5 Inspection 151

Chapter 6 Operation 165

Chapter 7 Function 187

Chapter 8 Care, Storage, and Disposal 285

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 287

Appendix 303
Contents

Contents

Labels and Symbols .......................................................................................................... 1


Important Information — Please Read Before Use ......................................................... 3
Intended use .......................................................................................................................... 3
Applicability of endoscopy and endoscopic treatment ........................................................... 3
Instruction manual ................................................................................................................. 3
User qualifications ................................................................................................................. 7
Instrument compatibility ......................................................................................................... 7
Repair and modification ......................................................................................................... 7
Signal words .......................................................................................................................... 8
Dangers, warnings, and cautions .......................................................................................... 8
Security ................................................................................................................................ 12
Cardiac applications ............................................................................................................ 13
Summary of Equipment Functions ................................................................................ 14
Displaying the endoscopic images on the monitor .............................................................. 14
Optical-digital observations ................................................................................................. 14
Adjusting the endoscopic images ........................................................................................ 14
Recording images ................................................................................................................ 15
Entering patient data ........................................................................................................... 15
Customizing the operations ................................................................................................. 15
Operation of ancillary equipment ......................................................................................... 15

Chapter 1 Checking the Package Contents ....................................... 17


1.1 Checking the package contents ........................................................................... 17

Chapter 2 Nomenclature and Functions ............................................ 19


2.1 Symbols and descriptions ..................................................................................... 19
2.2 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 21
2.3 Rear panel ............................................................................................................... 22
2.4 Keyboard (optional) ............................................................................................... 24
2.5 Side panels ............................................................................................................. 30
2.6 Monitor .................................................................................................................... 32
Endoscopic image display ................................................................................................... 32
Setting display (e.g.) ............................................................................................................ 34

Chapter 3 Installation and Connection ............................................... 35


3.1 Precautions of installation and connection ......................................................... 35
3.2 Installation work flow ............................................................................................. 36
3.3 Installation of the equipment ................................................................................ 37
Installation on the mobile workstation (WM-NP2, WM-NP1, or WM-WP1) .......................... 38
Installation in another location ............................................................................................. 39
3.4 Connection of the light source ............................................................................. 40

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL i


Contents

Compatible light sources ..................................................................................................... 40


CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, CLV-180 ...................................................................................... 41
CLV-S45 .............................................................................................................................. 42
CLV-S40 .............................................................................................................................. 43
3.5 Connection of the monitor ..................................................................................... 44
Compatible monitors ............................................................................................................ 44
OEV261H ............................................................................................................................ 44
OEV191H ............................................................................................................................ 46
OEV181H ............................................................................................................................ 50
OEV191 ............................................................................................................................... 52
3.6 Connection of the keyboard .................................................................................. 54
3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR) .............................................................. 55
Compatible video recorders ................................................................................................. 55
IMH-20 ................................................................................................................................. 56
IMH-10 ................................................................................................................................. 58
Other DVRs ......................................................................................................................... 60
3.8 Connection of the video printer ............................................................................ 62
Compatible video printers .................................................................................................... 62
3.9 Connection of the foot switch ............................................................................... 64
3.10 Connection to the AC mains power supply ......................................................... 65
When the mobile workstation (WM-NP2, WM-NP1, or WM-WP1) is used .......................... 66
When a mobile workstation other than the WM-NP2, WM-NP1, or WM-WP1 is used or when
no mobile workstation is used ............................................................................................. 67
3.11 Connection to the LINK-IN terminal ...................................................................... 69

Chapter 4 Function setup .................................................................... 71


4.1 Setup list ................................................................................................................. 71
4.2 Basic operation of the system setup .................................................................... 72
Displaying the system setup screen .................................................................................... 72
Editing the system setup ..................................................................................................... 75
Saving the system setup to the portable memory ............................................................... 77
Loading the system setup from the portable memory ......................................................... 78
4.3 System setup (system) .......................................................................................... 79
“Date/comment” tab ............................................................................................................. 80
“Operation” tab .................................................................................................................... 82
“Record setting” tab ............................................................................................................. 83
“Printer” tab .......................................................................................................................... 84
“Output format” tab .............................................................................................................. 84
“NR” tab ............................................................................................................................... 86
“Release time H” tab ............................................................................................................ 86
“Release time S” tab ............................................................................................................ 87
4.4 System setup (connection setting) ....................................................................... 88
Connection setting ............................................................................................................... 88
4.5 Basic operation of the user settings .................................................................... 90
Displaying the user settings screen ..................................................................................... 90

ii OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Contents

Editing and new registering the user settings ...................................................................... 92


Deleting the user settings .................................................................................................... 96
Saving the user settings to the portable memory ................................................................ 97
Loading the user settings from the portable memory ........................................................ 100
4.6 User settings (basic setup) ................................................................................. 105
“Release 1” tab .................................................................................................................. 106
“Release 2” tab .................................................................................................................. 107
“PIP/POP” tab .................................................................................................................... 108
“Enhancement” tab ............................................................................................................. 110
“Color/Bright.” tab ............................................................................................................... 112
“Observation 1” tab ............................................................................................................. 114
“Observation 2” tab ............................................................................................................. 116
4.7 User settings (switch presets) ............................................................................ 117
“Scope switch” tab .............................................................................................................. 117
“Front panel” tab ................................................................................................................. 118
“Keyboard” tab .................................................................................................................... 119
“Foot switch” tab ................................................................................................................ 120
Setting value of custom switch function ............................................................................. 121
4.8 User settings (OSD customization) .................................................................... 124
“OSD” tab .......................................................................................................................... 124
“Custom disp 1” tab ........................................................................................................... 126
“Custom disp 2” tab ........................................................................................................... 127
“Custom disp 3” tab ........................................................................................................... 128
4.9 User settings (Color tone) ................................................................................... 129
4.10 Security settings for administrators ................................................................... 130
Basic operation of the security settings ............................................................................. 130
“Account” tab ..................................................................................................................... 134
“User” tab ........................................................................................................................... 135
“Target menu” tab .............................................................................................................. 136
“Admin” tab ........................................................................................................................ 137
4.11 Secure user registration for administrators ...................................................... 138
Displaying the user ID ....................................................................................................... 138
Editing and new registering the user ID ............................................................................. 142
Deleting the user ID ........................................................................................................... 144
Saving the user ID to the portable memory ....................................................................... 145
Loading the user ID from the portable memory ................................................................. 146
4.12 Password .............................................................................................................. 148

Chapter 5 Inspection .......................................................................... 151


5.1 Precautions of inspection ................................................................................... 151
5.2 Inspection work flow ............................................................................................ 152
5.3 Inspection of the power supply .......................................................................... 153
5.4 Inspection of the examination light .................................................................... 154
5.5 Video monitor display inspection ....................................................................... 154
5.6 Inspection of the automatic brightness adjustment function .......................... 155

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL iii


Contents

5.7 Inspection of the monitor display ....................................................................... 156


5.8 Inspection of the freeze function ........................................................................ 157
5.9 Inspection of the release function ...................................................................... 158
5.10 Inspection of the PIP/POP function .................................................................... 159
5.11 Inspection of the orientation function ................................................................ 159
5.12 Inspection of the remote switches ...................................................................... 159
5.13 Inspection of the optical-digital observation function ...................................... 159
Confirming the available observation mode ...................................................................... 160
Inspection of NBI observation ............................................................................................ 161
Inspection of PDD observation .......................................................................................... 162
5.14 Inspection of power OFF ..................................................................................... 163

Chapter 6 Operation ........................................................................... 165


6.1 Precautions of operation ..................................................................................... 165
6.2 Operation flow ...................................................................................................... 167
6.3 Connection of an endoscope .............................................................................. 169
VISERA series videoscope ................................................................................................ 170
Fiberscope and camera head ............................................................................................ 171
Rigidscope and camera head ............................................................................................ 172
6.4 Turning the video system center ON .................................................................. 174
6.5 White balance adjustment ................................................................................... 175
6.6 Recall of user settings data ................................................................................. 178
6.7 Patient data ........................................................................................................... 181
Entering patient data ......................................................................................................... 182
Editing and deleting patient data ....................................................................................... 184
6.8 Observation and recording of the endoscopic image ....................................... 185
6.9 Termination of the operation ............................................................................... 186

Chapter 7 Function ............................................................................. 187


7.1 Basic operation of the menu list ......................................................................... 187
7.2 Logging in ............................................................................................................. 189
7.3 Brightness adjustment ......................................................................................... 190
Iris mode ............................................................................................................................ 190
Brightness .......................................................................................................................... 191
Exposure ........................................................................................................................... 193
Exposure area ................................................................................................................... 195
Electronic shutter ............................................................................................................... 196
Automatic gain control (AGC) ............................................................................................ 197
7.4 Image enhancement ............................................................................................. 198
Image enhancement .......................................................................................................... 198
Contrast mode ................................................................................................................... 199
Noise reduction .................................................................................................................. 200

iv OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Contents

7.5 Color tone adjustment ......................................................................................... 201


Color tone level adjustment ............................................................................................... 201
7.6 Zooming the image .............................................................................................. 203
Electronic zoom function ................................................................................................... 203
7.7 Changing the endoscopic image display ........................................................... 204
Freeze ............................................................................................................................... 204
Image size ......................................................................................................................... 205
7.8 Changing the displayed text information ........................................................... 206
Clearing characters from the screen ................................................................................. 206
Cursor ................................................................................................................................ 208
Displaying the endoscope information window .................................................................. 209
Displaying the custom switch information window ............................................................. 210
Arrow pointer ...................................................................................................................... 211
Displaying the hardware information ................................................................................. 214
7.9 Changing the observation mode ........................................................................ 215
Changing the observation mode (“WLI”, “NBI”, “PDD”) ..................................................... 215
Confirm the available optical-digital observation ............................................................... 216
NBI observation ................................................................................................................. 216
NBI color mode .................................................................................................................. 218
PDD (Photo Dynamic Diagnosis) observation ................................................................... 219
7.10 Recording the frozen image (releasing) ............................................................. 222
7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal
buffer) 223
Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port ........................................... 225
Removing the portable memory from the portable memory port ....................................... 226
Formatting the portable memory ....................................................................................... 227
Checking the portable memory .......................................................................................... 228
Remaining capacity indicator of the portable memory ....................................................... 229
Recording the frozen image to the memory ...................................................................... 230
Basic operation on thumbnail screen ................................................................................ 231
Operation on the image screen ......................................................................................... 235
Generating and storing the annotation images .................................................................. 238
Deleting the data including a folder ................................................................................... 240
Transferring the internal buffer folder ................................................................................ 241
Image files and folders ...................................................................................................... 243
Playback the images using the personal computer ........................................................... 249
7.12 Remotely controlling the DVR ............................................................................. 251
7.13 Remotely controlling the video printer .............................................................. 254
7.14 Remotely controlling the monitor ....................................................................... 257
Two screens display (PIP and POP displays) .................................................................... 257
Image source of the monitor .............................................................................................. 260
FLIP function ...................................................................................................................... 261
7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data ........................................ 262
Displaying the “Select patient” screen ............................................................................... 262
New registering and editing patient data ........................................................................... 263
Deleting patient data .......................................................................................................... 265

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL v


Contents

Calling patient data ............................................................................................................ 267


Saving patient data to the portable memory ...................................................................... 268
Loading patient data from portable memory ...................................................................... 271
7.16 Other functions ..................................................................................................... 274
Assigning functions to the custom switches ...................................................................... 274
Locking the keyboard ........................................................................................................ 275
Reset ................................................................................................................................. 276
Displaying the color bar and the 50% white screen ........................................................... 277
Selecting the mode of character input from the keyboard ................................................. 278
Confirming and editing data of the endoscope .................................................................. 279
System reset ...................................................................................................................... 281
7.17 Operation without the keyboard ......................................................................... 282
Operation by the “Function Operation Panel” menu .......................................................... 282
Character input by the software keyboard ......................................................................... 284

Chapter 8 Care, Storage, and Disposal ............................................ 285


8.1 Care ........................................................................................................................ 285
8.2 Storage .................................................................................................................. 286
8.3 Disposal ................................................................................................................. 286

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting ................................................................ 287


9.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 287
9.2 Troubleshooting guide ......................................................................................... 288
9.3 Returning the video system center for repair .................................................... 301

Appendix ............................................................................................... 303


Combination equipment ................................................................................................ 303
System chart ...................................................................................................................... 303
Specifications ................................................................................................................. 306
Environment ...................................................................................................................... 306
Specifications .................................................................................................................... 307
Default settings list ........................................................................................................ 313
System setup ................................................................ 313
User settings ................................................................. 314
Security settings for administrators .............................................. 316
Multilingual typing by the keyboard ............................................................................. 317
Security ........................................................................................................................... 319
Security level ..................................................................................................................... 319
EMC information ............................................................................................................ 320
License information of Open Source Software ........................................................... 326
GNU GPL ........................................................................................................................... 326
Others ................................................................................................................................ 326
End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules ........................... 327

vi OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Contents

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 with Exception .......................................... 327


newlib ................................................................................................................................ 328
libgloss ............................................................................................................................... 342
Index ............................................................................................................................... 349

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL vii


Contents

viii OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Labels and Symbols

Labels and Symbols

Safety-related labels and symbols are attached on the locations shown below. If labels or symbols are
missing or illegible, contact Olympus.

 Rear panel

Electric rating
The product name, rated voltage,
and frequency are shown.

VISERA ELITE
VIDEO SYSTEM CENTER CE marking
MODEL OLYMPUS OTV-S190
POEWER INPUT 220 – 240 V
50/60 Hz 150 VA
Crossed-out wheeled
bin’ symbol

Indicates to see the instruction


manual for the cable to be
connected.

Manufacturer name
Serial number plate
Potential equalization terminal

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1


Labels and Symbols

 Front panel

Dry the video connector before insertion.

UDI label
The UDI label is required by some countries’ regulations regarding
the identification of a medical device also known as Unique Device
Identification (UDI).

 Back cover of this instruction manual

Symbol Description

Manufacturer

Authorized representative in the European Community

2 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

Important Information — Please Read Before Use

 Intended use

This video system center has been designed to be used with OLYMPUS camera heads, endoscopes,
light sources, monitors, EndoTherapy accessories, and other ancillary equipment for endoscopic
diagnosis, treatment, and video observation. Do not use this video system center for any purpose
other than its intended use.

 Applicability of endoscopy and endoscopic treatment

If there is an official standard on the applicability of endoscopy and endoscopic treatment that is
defined by the hospital’s administration or other official institutions such as academic societies on
endoscopy, follow that standard. Before starting endoscopy and endoscopic treatment, thoroughly
evaluate its properties, purposes, effects, and possible risk (their natures, extent, and probability).
Perform endoscopy and endoscopic treatment only when its potential benefits are greater than its
risks.
Fully explain to the patient the potential benefits and risks of the endoscopy and endoscopic treatment
as well as any examination/treatment methods that can be performed in its place, and perform the
endoscopy and endoscopic treatment only after obtaining the consent of the patient.
Even after starting the endoscopy and endoscopic treatment, continue to evaluate the potential
benefits and risks, and immediately stop the endoscopy/treatment and take proper measures if the
risks to the patient become greater than the potential benefits.

 Instruction manual

This instruction manual contains essential information on using this video system center safely and
effectively. Before use, thoroughly review this manual and the manuals of all equipment that will be
used during the procedure and use the equipment as instructed.
Keep this and all related instruction manuals in a safe, accessible location. If you have any questions
or comments about any information in this manual, please contact Olympus.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

 Terms used in this manual


Light source:
The light source provides light and electrical signals to the endoscope. It also provides
electrical signals to the video system center.

Camera head:
The camera head is a device that converts endoscopic images from a fiberscope or
rigidscope into monitor images.

Video printer:
The video printer is a device that prints the frozen video image.

Wall mains outlet:


The wall mains outlet is a wall AC mains power outlet socket having the exclusive terminal
for grounding.

Isolation transformer:
The isolation transformer is a safety device that is used to isolate the non insulated
equipment with potentially high leakage currents to decrease the possibility of electric
shock.

Automatic brightness adjustment:


The automatic brightness adjustment automatically adjusts the intensity of the light emitted
from the light source so that the endoscopic image will be maintained at constant
brightness even if the distance between the distal end of the endoscope’s insertion tube
and the subject changes.

Image sensor (CCD):


Image sensor (CCD) is a device that converts light into electrical signals.

Electronic shutter:
Electronic shutter is a device that changes the exposure time of the image sensor so that
the brightness of an image is maintained on the video monitor.

Iris:
The iris function is used to electrically measure the brightness of an endoscopic image to
obtain a control signal for the purpose of automatic light adjustment.

Color adjustment:
Color adjustment adjusts the color balance on the monitor.

4 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

Freeze:
The freeze function creates a stationary view of the moving image.

Release:
The release function is used to capture and record an endoscopic image.

Edge enhancement:
Edge enhancement is an image processing technique that electronically sharpens the
edges of an image.

Structure enhancement:
Structure enhancement is an image processing technique that electronically emphasizes
the detailed patterns and edges of an image to increase sharpness.

AGC (automatic gain control):


The AGC is used to increase the brightness of an endoscopic image electrically when the
brightness of the image is dark because the distance between the endoscope’s distal end
and the object is too long.

PIP (Picture in Picture):


PIP function displays both the image of the endoscopic live image and the image of an
external device on the monitor simultaneously.

POP (Picture out Picture):


POP function displays both the image of the endoscopic live image and the image of an
external device on the monitor simultaneously.

Portable memory:
A digital medium for storage of images, etc.

Wash out:
Wash out is the inability to see details in the endoscopic image due to excessive
brightness.

SDTV:
Standard Definition Television. It is the format used in standard analog video systems.

HDTV:
High Definition Television. This is a format for high resolution video transmission featuring
higher definition than the standard SDTV format.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

Normal light observation (WLI = White Light Imaging):


This is observation using white light.

Optical-digital observation:
This is observation using filtered light.

NBI (Narrow Band Imaging) observation:


This is optical-digital observation using the narrow band light.

PDD (Photo Dynamic Diagnoses) observation:


This is optical-digital observation using exciting light.
This function may not be available in some areas.

Custom switch
The custom switch is a general term for the buttons, keys, and switches that functions can
be assigned; “CUSTOM” button 1 and 2 on the front panel, “CUSTOM” key A, B, C, and D
on the keyboard, remote switch 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the endoscope and remote switch 1, 2, 3,
and 4 on the foot switch.

Internal buffer
This is buffer space to store the frozen images, patient data, and user settings data.

6 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

 User qualifications

If there is an official standard on user qualifications to perform endoscopy and endoscopic treatment
that is defined by the medical administration or other official institutions, such as academic societies on
endoscopy, follow that standard. If there is no official qualification standard, the operator of this
instrument must be a physician approved by the medical safety manager of the hospital or person in
charge of the department (department of internal medicine, etc.).
The physician should be capable of safely performing the planned endoscopy and endoscopic
treatment following guidelines set by the academic societies on endoscopy, etc., and considering the
difficulty of endoscopy and endoscopic treatment. This manual does not explain or discuss endoscopic
procedures.

 Instrument compatibility

Refer to “ System chart” on page 303 to confirm that this video system center is compatible with the
ancillary equipment being used. Using incompatible equipment can result in patient injury or equipment
damage and makes it impossible to obtain the expected functionality.
This instrument complies with the EMC standard for medical electrical equipment, edition 4
(IEC 60601-1-2: 2014).
When connecting to an instrument that complies with a previous edition of the EMC standard for
medical electrical equipment edition, the EMC characteristics could be vulnerable.

 Repair and modification

This video system center does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Do not disassemble, modify or
attempt to repair it; patient or operator injury, equipment damage and/or the impossibility to obtain the
expected functionality can result. Some problems that appear to be malfunctions may be correctable
by referring to Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting”. If the problem cannot be resolved using the information in
Chapter 9, contact Olympus. This video system center is to be repaired by Olympus technicians only.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

 Signal words

The following signal words are used throughout this manual:

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in


DANGER
death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in


WARNING
death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
CAUTION or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices or potential
equipment damage.

NOTE Indicates additional helpful information.

 Dangers, warnings, and cautions

Follow the dangers, warnings and cautions given below when handling this video system center. This
information is to be supplemented by the dangers, warnings, and cautions given in each chapter.

DANGER
• Strictly observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may place the patient
and medical personnel in danger of electric shock.
 When this video system center is used to examine a patient, do not allow metal
parts of the endoscope or its accessories to touch metal parts of other system
components. Such contact may cause unintended current flow to the patient.
 Keep fluids away from all electrical equipment. If fluids are spilled on or into the
video system center, stop operation of the video system center immediately and
contact Olympus.
 Do not prepare, inspect or use this video system center with wet hands.
• Never install and operate the video system center in the following locations. An
explosion or fire may result because this video system center is not
explosion-proof.
 The concentration of oxygen is high.
 Oxidizing agents (such as nitrous oxide (N2O)) are present in the atmosphere.
 Flammable anesthetics are present in the atmosphere.
 Flammable liquids are near.

8 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

WARNING
• In case of video system center failure or malfunction, always keep another video
system center in the room ready for use.
• Never insert anything into the ventilation grills of the video system center. It can
cause an electric shock.
• Although the illumination light emitted from the endoscope’s distal end is required
for endoscopic observation and treatment, it may also cause alteration of living
tissues such as protein denaturation of liver tissue and perforation of the intestines
through inappropriate use. Observe the following warnings on the illumination.
 Always set the minimum required brightness. The brightness of the image on a
video monitor may differ from the actual brightness at the distal end of an
endoscope. Especially in combination with endoscopes using an electronic
shutter function, pay attention to the brightness level setting of the light source.
When this video system center is used with a light source compatible with
automatic brightness control function, be sure to use this function. The
automatic brightness control function can keep the illumination light properly.
Refer to the instruction manual for the light source for details.
 Do not continue observation in the proximity to tissue or keep the distal end of
the endoscope in contact with living tissue for a long time. It may cause patient
burns.
 When discontinuing the use of the endoscope, be sure to turn the light source
OFF.
• This video system center may interfere with other medical electronic equipment
used in combination with it. Before use, refer to the “Appendix” to confirm the
compatibility of this video system center with all equipment to be used.
• Do not use this video system center in locations exposed to strong electromagnetic
radiation (for example, in the vicinity of a microwave therapeutic equipment, MRI,
wireless set, short-wave therapeutic equipment, cellular/portable phone, etc.). This
may impair the performance of the video system center.
• If the endoscopic image dims during use, blood, mucus or debris may adhere to the
light guide on the distal end of the endoscope. Carefully withdraw the endoscope
from the patient and remove the blood or mucus in order to obtain optimum
illumination and to ensure the safety of the examination. If you continue to use the
endoscope in such a condition, the distal end temperature may rise and cause
mucosal burns. It may also cause patient and/or operator injury.
• Do not rely on the optical-digital observation method alone for primary detection of
lesions or for a decision regarding any potential diagnostic or therapeutic
intervention.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

WARNING
• For reasons described below, do not rely on the NBI observation modality alone for
primary detection of lesions or to make a decision regarding any potential
diagnostic or therapeutic intervention.
• To display endoscopic images, connect the output terminal of the video system
center directly to the monitor. Do not make the connection via any ancillary
equipment. Images may disappear during observation depending on the condition
of the ancillary equipment.
• The SDI signal is transmitted by daisy-chaining (chaining in a row) several devices.
If one of the devices is turned OFF, the SDI signal is not transmitted to the rest of
them.
• Be sure that this video system center is not used adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment (other than the components of this video system center or system) to
avoid electromagnetic interference.
• Electromagnetic interference may occur to this video system center when it is
placed near equipment marked with the following symbol or other portable and
mobile RF (Radio Frequency) communications equipment such as cellular phones.
If radio interference occurs, mitigation measures may be necessary, such as
reorienting or relocating this video system center or shielding the location.

CAUTION
• Do not use a pointed or hard object to press the buttons on the front panel and/or
keyboard. This may damage the buttons.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts inside the video system center’s connectors.
• Do not apply excessive force to this video system center and/or other instruments
connected. Otherwise, damage and/or malfunction can occur.
• Do not connect or disconnect the endoscope or camera head while this video
system center is turned ON. Connecting or disconnecting the endoscope while this
video system center is ON may damage the CCD. Turn the video system center
OFF before connecting or disconnecting the endoscope.
• Clean and vacuum dust the ventilation grills using a vacuum cleaner, when
necessary. Otherwise, the video system center may break down and gets damaged
from overheating.
• Do not position a medical device so that it is difficult to disconnect it from the wall
mains outlet.

10 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

NOTE
As defined by the international safety standard (IEC 60601-1), medical electrical
equipment is classified into the following types: TYPE CF applied part (the
instrument can safely be applied to any part of the body, including the heart), and
TYPE B/BF applied part (the instrument can safely be applied to any organ except
the heart). The part of the body that an endoscope or electrosurgical accessory can
safely be applied to depends on the classification of the equipment to which the
instruments are connected. Before beginning the procedure, check the current
leakage classification type of each instrument to be used for the procedure.
Classification types are clearly specified in the instruments’ instruction manuals.

Symbol Classification

TYPE CF applied part

TYPE BF applied part

TYPE B applied part

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 11


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

 Security

Set a password for a user account following the facility's security policy.
Creating a user account having no password may lead to a risk of “OTV-S190” being used by
unintended users.
To maintain system security, you are recommended to set the password having more than 10
characters with alphanumeric characters and symbols mixed, and change the password regularly.
Be sure to strictly manage the user account and the password to prevent them from being known by
third parties.
If the password has become known to third parties, be sure to change the password.
Otherwise, the security of “OTV-S190” cannot be ensured, and that may lead to a risk of personal
information leakage and data falsification by third parties.
Considering the possibility of data theft, corruption, and falsification, check that the portable memory is
not infected with a computer virus and then make connections.
Use the device constituting “OTV-S190” in an appropriate connection configuration as well as an
operating environment.
Use of “OTV-S190” in an inappropriate connection configuration as well as in an inappropriate use
environment may lead to malfunction and/or data loss.
Install the device following the installation instruction and installation environment recommended by
the manufacturer of the device.
Otherwise, it may cause damage or malfunction of the device.
As for the storage management for the product, follow the facility's security policy, considering the
possibility of leakage of personal information by unauthorized access and data falsification by third
parties.

12 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Important Information — Please Read Before Use

 Cardiac applications

DANGER
• Use only the devices listed in “ System chart” on page 303 for endoscopic
observation or treatment of the heart or areas near the heart. Other combinations
of equipment may cause ventricular fibrillation or seriously affect the cardiac
function of the patient.
• For cardiac applications, never support the endoscope with a metal surgical arm
that is not electrically isolated from the ground. If not isolated, the endoscope will
be connected to the ground through the surgical arm and bed, and will conduct
unexpected leakage current that may seriously affect the cardiac function of the
patient.
• The use of medical devices not specifically designed for cardiac applications may
cause ventricular fibrillation or seriously affect the cardiac function of the patient. As
specified by the international standard IEC 60601-1, any applied part used for
observation or treatment of the heart or areas near the heart must meet “TYPE CF
applied part” requirements for low electrical leakage current. When using
endoscopes for endoscopic cardiac applications, the applied part requirements
include all devices directly connected to the endoscope, such as the light guide
cable, camera head and telescope holder. Each of these devices must individually
meet the “TYPE CF applied part” requirements for leakage current limits if they are
to be used for cardiac applications.

NOTE
• The light guide cables and camera heads listed in “ System chart” on page 303
(TYPE CF applied part) that are suitable for cardiac applications bear a mark.
• The surgical holder for telescope (SH-1) has an electrically isolated arm structure
that isolates the endoscope from the ground. This design makes the SH-1 suitable
for cardiac applications.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13


Summary of Equipment Functions

Summary of Equipment Functions

This video system center is a system controller of the endoscopic image observation system that
displays, records, and prints endoscopic images. Some of the functions of this video system center
described below are enabled only when the required equipment are connected to this video system
center. For more details, refer to the instruction manuals for this video system center and the required
ancillary equipment.

 Displaying the endoscopic images on the monitor

• The endoscopic live image and the other images of the equipment connected to this video
system center can be displayed on the monitor.
• Either a standard-definition (SDTV) monitor or high-definition (HDTV) monitor can be used.

 Optical-digital observations

NBI observation or PDD*1 observation is available.


 See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on page 215
*1 PDD observation may not be available in some areas.

 Adjusting the endoscopic images

Images can be adjusted to enable clear and convenient observation.


• Adjustment of the image color
 See “ Color tone level adjustment” on page 201.
• Changing the brightness
 See “ Brightness” on page 191.
• Changing the iris mode
 See “ Iris mode” on page 190.
• Changing the contrast mode
 See “ Contrast mode” on page 199.
• Enhancement of edge lines and patterns of the images
 See “ Image enhancement” on page 198.
• Changing the image size
 See “ Image size” on page 205.
• Enlargement of the images
 See “ Electronic zoom function” on page 203.

14 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Summary of Equipment Functions

 Recording images

• The endoscopic image can be recorded on the portable memory.


 See Section 7.10, “Recording the frozen image (releasing)” on page 222.
 See Section 7.11, “Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or
internal buffer)” on page 223.
• The endoscopic image can be recorded on the image-recording device connected to this
video system center, and the recorded images can be played back.
 See Section 7.10 on page 222.

 Entering patient data

• The patient data such as name, sex, etc. can be entered and displayed on the monitor with
the endoscopic live image.
 See Section 6.7, “Patient data” on page 181.
 See Section 7.15, “Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data” on page 262.
• Up to 50 sets of patients data can be stored.
 See Section 7.15 on page 262.
• Up to 50 sets of patient data can be stored on the portable memory. These patient data can
be copied to the other OTV-S190.
 See Section 7.15 on page 262.
• Entering patient data is unnecessary if it is captured from the image filing system.
 See Section 7.15 on page 262.

 Customizing the operations

Up to 20 remote switch settings and other functions such as iris mode, image enhancement, etc., can
be stored.
 See Section 4.5, “Basic operation of the user settings” on page 90.

 Operation of ancillary equipment

• Digital video recorder


 See Section 7.12, “Remotely controlling the DVR” on page 251.
• Video printer
 See Section 7.13, “Remotely controlling the video printer” on page 254.
• Monitor
 See Section 7.14, “Remotely controlling the monitor” on page 257.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15


Summary of Equipment Functions

16 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


1.1 Checking the package contents

Chapter 1 Checking the Package


Contents

1.1 Checking the package contents

Match all items in the package with the components shown below. Inspect each item for damage. If the Ch.1
video system center is damaged, a component is missing, or you have any questions, do not use the
video system center; immediately contact Olympus.

 Video system center

VISERA ELITE video system center (OTV-S190)

 Accessories

SDI cable 2.5 M (MAJ-1951) Foot holder (MAJ-1433, 4 pcs.) Portable memory (MAJ-1925)

Power cord Cable color sheet Instruction manual

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 17


1.1 Checking the package contents

Ch.1

18 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.1 Symbols and descriptions

Chapter 2 Nomenclature and


Functions

2.1 Symbols and descriptions

 Front panel

Symbol Description Symbol Description


Ch.2
Power ON/OFF Reset

White balance

 Rear panel

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Potential equalization
Serial number
terminal

Refer to instructions. Alternating current

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 19


2.1 Symbols and descriptions

 Keyboard

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Switch info Video source

+ Add data A Cursor

Stopwatch Freeze

Release Zoom
Ch.2

Image size PIP/POP ON

PIP/POP mode PIP/POP input select

Exam Menu

20 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.2 Front panel

2.2 Front panel

1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8

Ch.2
14
13
12
11 10 9

No. Nomenclature Description


1 Power switch Press to turn the video system center ON or OFF.
2 Power indicator Lights up when the video system center is ON.
3 Video connector The video plug of the videoscope or camera head is connected to this socket.
socket
4 Locking lever Press down to disconnect the video plug of the videoscope or camera head.
5 Menu button Press to display the menu list.
6 ENTER button Determine the item selected in the menu list.
7 Directional key Select a menu in the menu list.
8 CUSTOM button Press to assign a function to each button.
See “ Assigning functions to the custom switches” on page 274.
9 White balance Press to perform the white balance adjustment.
button See Section 6.5, “White balance adjustment” on page 175.
10 Complete indicator Lights up when the white balance adjustment is completed.
11 Portable memory Insert the portable memory in this port.
port See “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on page 225.
12 Access indicator This indicator lights up green when the portable memory is inserted into the portable
memory port, and blinks orange while accessing the portable memory.
See “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on page 225.
13 Access stop button Press to stop accessing the portable memory. Be sure to press this button before
removing the portable memory from the portable memory port.
See “ Removing the portable memory from the portable memory port” on page 226.
14 Reset button Press and hold this button to return the settings changed during operation to the default
settings.
See “ Reset” on page 276.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 21


2.3 Rear panel

2.3 Rear panel

6
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
Ch.2 10
11
5

12

15 14

16 13

22 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.3 Rear panel

No. Nomenclature Description


1 Keyboard terminal Connect the keyboard.
2 DVI out terminal Connect the monitor having the DVI IN terminal.
Output digital video signal.
3 Remote 1 terminal Output a signal synchronizing the DVR (Rec/Pause) operation.
4 Remote 2 terminal Output a signal synchronizing the release operation.
5 Monitor OUT Connect the SDTV monitor. Output analog signals to the SDTV monitor.
terminal
6 Printer OUT Output analog signals to the video printer.
terminal
7 Y/C OUT terminal Output a Y/C video signals.
8 Composite OUT Output the composite video signal.
terminal Ch.2
9 Foot switch Connect the foot switch.
terminal
10 Potential This terminal is connected to a potential equalization terminal of the other equipment
equalization connected to this video system center. The electric potential of their equipment are
terminal made equal.
11 AC power inlet Connect the provided power cord to supply AC power via this inlet.
12 Light control Connect the light source. Output analog signals to the light source.
terminal
13 HD/SD SDI OUT 1 Connect a monitor compatible with the serial digital interface (SDI).
terminal Output the SDI signal.
14 HD/SD SDI OUT 2 Connect a monitor compatible with the serial digital interface (SDI).
terminal Output the SDI signal.
15 Monitor remote Connect the OEV261H or printer. Establish communication with the monitor and/or
terminal printer.
16 Light source Connect the light source. Establish communication with the light source.
terminal

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 23


2.4 Keyboard (optional)

2.4 Keyboard (optional)

5 9
4 8
3 7 10
2 11
1 6

Ch.2

15
13
16
14 12
17

24 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.4 Keyboard (optional)

No. Nomenclature Description


1 SWITCH INFO key Press to display information of functions assigned to the remote switches on the
endoscope, foot switches, “CUSTOM” keys on the keyboard, and “CUSTOM” buttons on
the front panel in the endoscopic image display.
See “ Displaying the custom switch information window” on page 210.
2 ADD DATA key Press to change the clearing character mode in the endoscopic image display.
See “ Clearing characters from the screen” on page 206.
Press together with the “Shift” key to display the “User select” menu to set and call up
the observation condition of the endoscopic image.
See Section 4.5, “Basic operation of the user settings” on page 90.
3 VIDEO SOURCE Press to change the input source of the monitor remotely.
key
4 CURSOR key Press to switch the display of the cursor on screen ON and OFF.
Ch.2
See “ Cursor” on page 208.
Press together with the “Shift” key to display the “Patient select” menu to enter or call up
the patient data onto the monitor.
See Section 7.15, “Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data” on page 262.
5 Not used.
6 PDD key Press to change the observation mode from the normal light observation mode to the
PDD observation mode.
See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on page 215.
7 WLI key Press to change the observation mode from the optical-digital observation mode to the
normal light observation mode.
See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on page 215.
8 NBI key Press to change the observation mode from the normal light observation mode to the
NBI observation mode.
See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on page 215.
9 PDD GAIN key Switches the brightness of the image in the PDD observation mode.
See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on page 215.
10 MENU key Press to display the Menu list to set the basic functions of this video system center.
See Section 4.2, “Basic operation of the system setup” on page 72.
See Chapter 7, “Function” on page 187.
11 EXAM key Press at the start and end of the examination.
See Section 6.9, “Termination of the operation” on page 186.
12 Not used.
13 Not used.
14 Not used.
15 Not used.
16 Not used.
17 Not used.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 25


2.4 Keyboard (optional)

18
19 25
24 26 27
20
23
22
21 28

Ch.2

32 32
30
33
31

34
29

26 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.4 Keyboard (optional)

No. Nomenclature Description


18 RELEASE key Press to record the image into the portable memory and video printer.
 See Section 7.10, “Recording the frozen image (releasing)”on page 222.
19 FREEZE key Press to freeze the live endoscopic image. Press the key again to return to the live
image.
See “ Freeze” on page 204.
20 Not used.
21 PIP/POP ON key Press to change the display mode between PIP and POP.
See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
22 ZOOM key Press to magnify the image in three levels, including “× 1.0”.
See “ Electronic zoom function” on page 203.
23 PIP/POP MODE Press to change the display in the PIP or POP mode.
key See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257. Ch.2
24 IMAGE SIZE key Press to change the image area size on the monitor.
See “ Image size” on page 205.
25 PIP/POP INPUT Press to change the external image in the PIP or POP mode.
SELECT key See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
26 KEY LOCK KEY LOCK indicator
indicator Lights up in the key lock mode.
See “ Locking the keyboard” on page 275.
27 CAPS LOCK Lights up in the caps lock input mode.
indicator
28 INSERT indicator Lights up in the character overwrite mode.
29 CUSTOM A, B, C, Press to activate the function set in “Custom 1” of “Keyboard Option” in the “System
D key Setup” menu.
See “ Assigning functions to the custom switches” on page 274.
30 Enter key Press to fix entry and move to the next text box or screen.
31 Arrow key Cancels the selection or returns to the previous screen.
32 Shift, Alt, Ctrl key Executes functions together with other keys.
33 Caps Lock key Press to switch between capital letter input mode and small letter input mode.
34 Tab key Press to move to the next input area, or returns to the previous input area.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 27


2.4 Keyboard (optional)

35 49
36 48
37 47
38 46
39 45 50
40 44
41 43
42

Ch.2

28 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.4 Keyboard (optional)

No. Nomenclature Description


35 Esc key Cancels the selection or returns to the previous screen.
36 F1 key Not used.
37 F2 key Press to display the “Exposure setting” menu.
See “ Brightness” on page 191.
38 F3 key Press to display the “Color setting” menu to adjust the color of the endoscopic image.
See “ Color tone level adjustment” on page 201.
39 F4 key Not used.
40 F5 key Press to switch the auto gain control (AGC) function ON and OFF.
See “ Automatic gain control (AGC)” on page 197.
Press together with the “Shift” key to lock the keyboard operation, inhibiting the input of
characters. The indicator lights up when the keyboard operation is locked.
See “ Locking the keyboard” on page 275. Ch.2
41 F6 key Press to select a printer or DVR to be controlled remotely. Either selected indicator lamp
of the device lights up.
See Section 7.12, “Remotely controlling the DVR” on page 251.
Press to activate remote control of the video printer from the keyboard.
See Section 7.13, “Remotely controlling the video printer” on page 254.
42 F7 key Press to pause ( ) the DVR. Press the Scroll Lock ( ) key to resume play.
See Section 7.12 on page 251.
43 F8 key Not used.
44 F9 key Press to start ( ) DVR recording.
See Section 7.12 on page 251.
45 F10 key Not used.
46 F11 key Press to capture the image in the video printer.
See Section 7.13 on page 254.
Press to playback ( ) the DVR.
See Section 7.12 on page 251.
47 F12 key Press to print the images captured in the video printer.
See Section 7.13 on page 254.
48 Insert key Press to switch between character insert mode and character overwrite mode.
49 Delete key Clears the character right of the cursor.
50 BackSpace key Clears the character left of the cursor.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 29


2.5 Side panels

2.5 Side panels

1
Front view and right view
Ch.2

Rear view and left view

30 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.5 Side panels

No. Nomenclature Description


1 Ventilation grilles Prevent the internal temperature of video system center rising by ventilating.

Ch.2

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 31


2.6 Monitor

2.6 Monitor

 Endoscopic image display

7
1
8
2
9
3
4
Ch.2
5
6
10

11

32 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


2.6 Monitor

No. Nomenclature Description


1 Patient data Patient data such as name sex, etc. can be entered and displayed in this area.
 Section 6.7, “Patient data” on page 181
2 System clock Date and time are displayed. The date format can be set.
 “ “Date/comment” tab” on page 80
3 Image recording The status of the image recording devices that record and print the image are
device display displayed according to settings.
4 Memory capacity Indicates the remaining memory level of the portable memory and internal buffer.
 “ Remaining capacity indicator of the portable memory” on page 229
5 Image information Displays image information on the monitor. The indications are displayed only when
these function are operated.
6 Comments Comments can be entered and displayed together with the patient data.
7 Observation mode Indicates the name of the special observation function during the observation. Ch.2
display  Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on page 215
8 Arrow pointer The arrow pointer is used for pointing out a part of the endoscopic image and for
entering data in the menus.
 “ Arrow pointer” on page 211
9 Endoscopic image The live endoscopic image is displayed in this area. The size and shape of the image
depends on the type of endoscope used.
10 Orientation “R” mark appears when a 180 reverse image is displayed.
 “ “Observation 1” tab” on page 114
11 Status icon The status of the video system center is indicated by icons.
There are unsent images.
Unsent images are being transferred.
The internal buffer is under processing.
The DVR is in recording status.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 33


2.6 Monitor

 Setting display (e.g.)

1 7

Ch.2
5

No. Nomenclature Description


1 Screen indicator Setting screen’s name is displayed.
2 Tub Setting items are categorized by setting contents with tabs.
3 Item name Name of setup item.
4 Settings List of setting item. A chosen item is displayed gray.
5 Operation button The buttons selected by operations are indicated.
6 Operation indicator The keys available on the keyboard are indicated.
7 Opration guide The discription of selected setting item is displayed.

34 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.1 Precautions of installation and connection

Chapter 3 Installation and Connection


Prepare this video system center and compatible equipment (shown in “ System chart” on page 303)
before each use. Referring to the instruction manuals of each system component, install and connect
the equipment according to the procedure described in this chapter.

3.1 Precautions of installation and connection

WARNING
• Review this chapter thoroughly, and prepare the instruments properly before use. If
the equipment is not properly prepared before each use, equipment damage,
patient and operator injury and/or fire can occur.
Ch.3
• When nonmedical electrical ancillary equipment is used, connect its power cord via
an isolation transformer prior to connecting it to this video system center. Failure to
do so can cause electric shock, burns and/or fire.

CAUTION
• Turn OFF all system components before connecting them. Otherwise, equipment
damage or malfunction can result.
• Use appropriate cables only. Otherwise, equipment damage or malfunction can
result.
• Properly and securely connect all cables. If the cable connector has a locking
mechanism, such as connection screws, lock the cable connector. Otherwise,
equipment damage or malfunction, such as no images on the monitor can result.
• The cables should not be sharply bent, pulled, twisted or crushed. Cable damage
can result.
• Never apply excessive force to connectors. This could damage the connectors.
• Use this video system center only under the conditions described in
“ Environment” on page 306 and “ Specifications” on page 307. Otherwise,
improper performance, compromised safety and/or equipment damage may result.
• Connect all cables to the video system center before connecting the power cord.
Otherwise, equipment damage or malfunction can result.

NOTE
For easy cable connection, attach the cable color sheet to each cable of ancillary
equipment.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 35


3.2 Installation work flow

3.2 Installation work flow

Please see the installation work flow below. Follow each step of the work flow before using the video
system center and the ancillary equipment.

CAUTION
Connect the power cord to the power source after connecting all cables. Otherwise,
equipment damage or malfunction can result.

Install the video system center and the ancillary equipment


1 on the mobile workstation or another stable location
Section 3.3 on page 37

Ch.3
Connect the light source.
2 Section 3.4 on page 40

Connect the monitor.


3 Section 3.5 on page 44

Connect the keyboard.


4 Section 3.6 on page 54

Connect other ancillary equipment (when using the


following equipment).
5 • DVR Section 3.7 on page 55
• Video printer Section 3.8 on page 62
• Foot switch Section 3.9 on page 64

Connect the instruments to the power source.


6 Section 3.10 on page 65

36 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.3 Installation of the equipment

3.3 Installation of the equipment

CAUTION
• Do not place any object on the top of the video system center. Otherwise,
equipment deformation and damage can result.
• Keep the ventilation grills of the video system center clear. The ventilation grills are
located on the side panels. Blockage can cause overheating and equipment
damage.
• Place the video system center on a stable, level surface using the foot holders
(MAJ-1433). Otherwise, the video system center may topple down or drop, and
user or patient injury may occur, or equipment damage can result.
• If a trolley other than the mobile workstation (WM-NP2, WM-NP1, or WM-WP1) is
used, confirm that the trolley can withstand the weight of the equipment installed on Ch.3
it.
• Do not install the video system center near a source of strong magnetic wave
(microwave treatment device, short wave treatment device, MRI, radio equipment,
or cellular phones, etc.). Otherwise, the video system center may malfunction.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 37


3.3 Installation of the equipment

 Installation on the mobile workstation (WM-NP2, WM-NP1,


or WM-WP1)

1 Place the mobile workstation on a level surface. Lock the caster brakes by pushing
them down as shown in Figure 3.1.

Push to lock. Push to release.

Ch.3
Caster brakes

Figure 3.1

2 Install the mobile shelf of the mobile workstation according to the configuration of the
equipment installed on it as described in the mobile workstation’s instruction manual.
Peel the paper from the back of the foot holders and attach them lightly at the right
position on the light source using the pattern sheet.
3 Place the pattern sheet on the light source. The pattern sheet is packed with the foot
holder (MAJ-1433).

Pattern sheet
Foot holder

Peel off.

Figure 3.2

4 Peel the paper from the back of the foot holders and attach them lightly at the right
position on the light source using the pattern sheet. (See Figure 3.2)
5 Place the video system center on the light source and confirm that the feet of the
video system center fit into the foot holders.

38 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.3 Installation of the equipment

6 Take down the video system center from the light source.
7 Remove the pattern sheet and attach the foot holders firmly.
8 Place the light source on the mobile shelf of the mobile workstation as described in
the light source’s instruction manual.

CAUTION
When using a light source that is smaller than the video system center, such as
CLV-S45, CLV-S40, place the light source on the video system center. Otherwise,
the video system center may not be stable and could fall off the cart.

9 Place the video system center on the light


source so that the feet of the video system
center fit into the foot holders.

Ch.3

This video
system center

Light source

Figure 3.3

 Installation in another location

When installing the video system center in another location, adhere the foot holders as described on
the previous page, and place the video system center on them.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 39


3.4 Connection of the light source

3.4 Connection of the light source

 Compatible light sources

For compatible light sources, see Table 3.1.

Product name Model Reference


VISERA ELITE xenon light source CLV-S190
 See “ CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, CLV-180” on
VISERA Pro xenon light source CLV-S40Pro
page 41.
EVIS EXERA II xenon light source CLV-180
VISERA xenon light source CLV-S45  See “ CLV-S45” on page 42
VISERA xenon light source CLV-S40  See “ CLV-S40” on page 43

Table 3.1
Ch.3
NOTE
• Only when the CLV-S190 or CLV-S40Pro is used, the optical-digital observation
can be used.
• Only when the CLV-S190 or CLV-S40Pro is used, the brightness adjustment
function interlocked with the light source works.

40 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.4 Connection of the light source

 CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, CLV-180

Connect the light source (CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, or CLV-180) to the video system
center using the cable in Table 3.2 as shown in Figure 3.4.

 Cable

Product name Model Note


Light source cable MAJ-1959
Light source cable with remote 10M MAJ-1913 Use one of the cables
Light source cable with remote 1.8M MAJ-1953

Table 3.2

Ch.3
 Connecting diagram

LIGHT
SOURCE
terminal
OTV

MAJ-1959 MAJ-1913、MAJ-1953

OTV terminal

To the LINK-IN
terminal on the equipment
having the LINK-IN terminal

CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, CLV-180

Figure 3.4

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 41


3.4 Connection of the light source

 CLV-S45

Connect the light source (CLV-S45) to the video system center using the cable in
Table 3.3 as shown in Figure 3.5.

 Cable

Product name Model Note


Light control cable MAJ-1567 –

Table 3.3

 Connecting diagram
Ch.3
LIGHT CONTROL terminal
OTV

MAJ-1567

Light control terminal


CLV-S45

Figure 3.5

42 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.4 Connection of the light source

 CLV-S40

Connect the light source (CLV-S40) to the video system center using the cable in
Table 3.4 as shown in Figure 3.6.

 Cable

Product name Model Note


Light control cable MAJ-1567 –

Table 3.4

 Connecting diagram
Ch.3
LIGHT CONTROL terminal
OTV

MAJ-1567

Light control terminal CLV-S40

Figure 3.6

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 43


3.5 Connection of the monitor

3.5 Connection of the monitor

 Compatible monitors

For compatible monitors, see Table 3.5.

Product name Model Reference


High definition LCD monitor OEV261H  See “ OEV261H” on page 44.
High definition LCD monitor OEV191H  See “ OEV191H” on page 46.
High definition LCD monitor OEV181H  See “ OEV181H” on page 50.
LCD monitor OEV191  See “ OEV191” on page 52.

Table 3.5

Ch.3 NOTE
The monitor can be controlled remotely only when using the OEV261H.

 OEV261H

Connect the monitors (OEV261H) to the video system center using the cables in
Table 3.6 as shown in Figure 3.7.

 Cables

Product name Model Note


SDI cable 2.5M MAJ-1951
SDI cable 8.5M MAJ-1912
Use one of the cables.
SDI cable (22 m) MAJ-1464
DVI cable MAJ-1945
HDTV monitor remote cable 2.5M MAJ-1956
When using the printer, use the
HDTV monitor remote cable 8.5M MAJ-1955 multi remote cable.
Multi Remote Cable 2.5M MAJ-1957 When not using the printer, use
Multi Remote Cable 8.5M MAJ-1906 the high definition monitor remote
cable.
Multi Remote Cable 15M MAJ-1982

Table 3.6

44 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.5 Connection of the monitor

NOTE
When displaying the endoscopic image, the setting value of “Preset” of the monitor
is set to “Preset J”. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the OEV261H.

 Connecting diagram

SDI 1 IN terminal

Ch.3

HD/SD SDI OUT


OEV261H
RS-232C IN 2 terminal
MAJ-1912,
MAJ-1464,
MAJ-1951
MAJ-1906, MAJ-1955, MAJ-1956,
MAJ-1957, MAJ-1982

Color sheet
MONITOR REMOTE (brown)
MAJ-1945

Monitor remote terminal

Use either
cable. OTV

HD/SD SDI OUT 1 terminal

Color sheet
「HD/SD SDI OUT1」(brown)

Figure 3.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 45


3.5 Connection of the monitor

 OEV191H

For connecting the OEV191H, follow either of the two ways below.
• When using SDI video signal
• When using RGB or YPbPr video signal

 When using SDI video signal

Connect the monitor (OEV191H) to the video system center using the cables in
Table 3.7 as shown in Figure 3.8.

(a) Cables

Ch.3 Product name Model Note


SDI cable 2.5M MAJ-1951
SDI cable 8.5M MAJ-1912 Use one of the cables.
SDI cable (22 m) MAJ-1464
HD/SD-SDI adapter MAJ-1431 Attach to OEV191H

Table 3.7

46 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.5 Connection of the monitor

(b) Connecting diagram

HD/SD SDI IN
terminal

MAJ-1431

MAJ-1912, MAJ-1464, OEV191H


MAJ-1951

Ch.3

Cable color sheet


“HD/SD SDI OUT1” (brown) HD/SD SDI OUT 1 terminal

OTV

Figure 3.8

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 47


3.5 Connection of the monitor

 When using RGB or YPbPr video signal

Connect the monitor (OEV191H) to the video system center using the cables in
Table 3.8 as shown in Figure 3.9.

(a) Cables

Product name Model Note


Monitor cable (7 m) MAJ-1462
HDTV/SDTV monitor cable (2 m) MAJ-1586 Use one of the cables.
HDTV/SDTV monitor cable (15 m) MAJ-1584

Table 3.8

Ch.3

48 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.5 Connection of the monitor

(b) Connecting diagram

V Y/C G B R S

MAJ-1462,
MAJ-1584, VIDEO-IN
Y/C-IN
MAJ-1586

Ch.3

OEV191H
R/G/B/S IN terminal

Cable color sheet


“MONITOR OUT” (brown)

Monitor terminal

OTV

Figure 3.9

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 49


3.5 Connection of the monitor

 OEV181H

Connect the monitor (OEV181H) to the video system center using the cables in
Table 3.9 as shown in Figure 3.10.

 Cables

Product name Model Note


Monitor cable (7 m) MAJ-1462
HDTV/SDTV monitor cable (2 m) MAJ-1586 Use one of the cables.
HDTV/SDTV monitor cable (15 m) MAJ-1584

Table 3.9

Ch.3

50 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.5 Connection of the monitor

 Connecting diagram

OEV181H

Line A-IN

Y/C
MAJ-1462,
MAJ-1584, G
MAJ-1586

B
S-Video-IN

S Ch.3

R/G/B/S IN terminal

Cable color sheet


“MONITOR OUT” (brown)

Monitor terminal

OTV

Figure 3.10

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 51


3.5 Connection of the monitor

 OEV191

Connect the monitor (OEV191) to the video system center using the cables in
Table 3.10 as shown in Figure 3.11.

 Cables

Product name Model Note


Monitor cable (7 m) MAJ-1462
HDTV/SDTV monitor cable (15 m) MAJ-1584 Use one of the cables.
HDTV/SDTV monitor cable (2 m) MAJ-1586

Table 3.10

Ch.3

52 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.5 Connection of the monitor

 Connecting diagram

V Y/C G B R S

VIDEO-IN Y/C-IN

MAJ-1462,
MAJ-1584,
MAJ-1586,

OEV191
R/G/B/S IN terminal
Cable color sheet
“MONITOR OUT” (brown)
Ch.3

Monitor terminal

OTV

Figure 3.11

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 53


3.6 Connection of the keyboard

3.6 Connection of the keyboard

For compatible keyboards, see Table 3.11.

Connect the keyboard to the video system center using the cables as shown in
Figure 3.12.

 Keyboard

Product name Model Note


Keyboard MAJ-1921 –
Keyboard MAJ-1922 –

Ch.3 Keyboard MAJ-1924 –

Table 3.11

CAUTION
Do not use a keyboard other than the keyboards shown in the above table. The
keyboard may not work correctly.

 Connecting diagram

OTV

Keyboard terminal

MAJ-1921, MAJ-1922, MAJ-1924

Figure 3.12

54 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

 Compatible video recorders

For compatible video recorders, see Table 3.12.


For details, refer to the instruction manuals for the video recorder.

Model Manufacture Reference


IMH-20 OLYMPUS  See “ IMH-20” on page 56.
IMH-10 OLYMPUS  See “ IMH-10” on page 58.
PDW-75MD SONY
See “ Other DVRs” on page 60.
DVO-1000MDP SONY

Table 3.12
Ch.3

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 55


3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

 IMH-20

Connect the DVR (IMH-20) to the video system center using the cables in Table 3.13
as shown in Figure 3.13.

 Cables

Product name Model Note


SDI cable 2.5M MAJ-1951
SDI cable 8.5M MAJ-1912 Use one of the cables.
SDI cable (22 m) MAJ-1464
VTR remote cable MAJ-438 –

Table 3.13
Ch.3

56 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

 Connecting diagram

SDI1 OUT OEV261H


MAJ-1912, MAJ-1464,
MAJ-1951

Ch.3
EXT SW1 IN

SDIA IN IMH-20

MAJ-438

Remote 1
OTV

Connection of the OTV and OEV261H is omitted.

Figure 3.13

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 57


3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

 IMH-10

Connect the DVR (IMH-10) to the video system center using the cables in Table 3.14
as shown in Figure 3.14.

 Cables

Product name Model Note


SDI cable 2.5M MAJ-1951
SDI cable 8.5M MAJ-1912 Use one of the cables.
SDI cable (22 m) MAJ-1464
VTR remote cable MAJ-438 –

Table 3.14
Ch.3

58 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

 Connecting diagram

SDI1 OUT
OEV261H
MAJ-1912, MAJ-1464,
MAJ-1951

EXT SW1 IN
Ch.3

IMH-10
SDI IN

MAJ-438

Remote 1
OTV

Connection of the OTV and OEV261H is omitted.

Figure 3.14

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 59


3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

 Other DVRs

Connect other DVRs to the video system center using the cables in Table 3.15 as
shown in Figure 3.15.

 Cables

Product name Model Note


S-video cable MH-985
Use one of the cables.
S-video cable MAJ-987
VTR remote cable MAJ-438 –

Table 3.15

Ch.3

60 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.7 Connection of the video recorder (DVR)

 Connecting diagram

To the S-video IN terminal on the DVR.


To the ExtSW terminal
on the DVR.

MAJ-438 MH-985 or MAJ-987

OTV

Ch.3
Remote 1 terminal Y/C OUT terminal

Figure 3.15

NOTE
Only recording and pause operations can be operated.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 61


3.8 Connection of the video printer

3.8 Connection of the video printer

 Compatible video printers

For compatible color video printers, see Table 3.16.

Product name Model Manufacture Note


Color video printer UP-25MDP SONY –
Color video printer UP-21MDP SONY –

Table 3.16

Connect the video printer to the video system center using the cables in Table 3.17 as
shown in Figure 3.16.
Ch.3

 Cables

Product name Model Note


Monitor cable MH-984
Use one of the cables.
SCV cable and SCV adapter MD-445 + MAJ-849
BNC cable MB-677 –
Multi remote cable 2.5M MAJ-1957
Multi remote cable 8.5M MAJ-1906 Use one of the cables.
Multi Remote Cable 15M MAJ-1982

Table 3.17

62 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.8 Connection of the video printer

 Connecting diagram

VIDEO IN terminal

OEV261H
RS-232C terminal

MB-677

Ch.3
Remote2 terminal

Video printer
MAJ-1906,
VIDEO OUT terminal MAJ-1957,
MAJ-1982

INPUT R/G/B/SYNC
terminals
MH-984,
MD-445+MAJ-849 Cable color sheet
“HARD COPY” (green)

Printer OUT terminal

OTV

Monitor remote terminal Cable color sheet


“MONITOR REMOTE” (brown)

Figure 3.16

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 63


3.9 Connection of the foot switch

3.9 Connection of the foot switch

For a compatible foot switch, see Table 3.18.

Product name Model Note


Foot switch MAJ-1391 –

Table 3.18
For the naked-eye PDD observation, connect the foot switch to the light source.

 Connecting diagram

Connect the foot switch (MAJ-1391) to the video system center as shown in
Ch.3 Figure 3.17.

OTV
Foot switch terminal

MAJ-1391

Figure 3.17

64 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.10 Connection to the AC mains power supply

3.10 Connection to the AC mains power supply

DANGER
• Be sure to connect the power plug of the power cord directly to a grounded wall
mains outlet. If the video system center is not grounded properly, it can cause an
electric shock.
• Do not connect the power plug to the 2-pole power circuit with a 3-pole to 2-pole
adapter. It can prevent proper grounding and cause an electric shock.
• Do not connect the power plug using an extension cord. It can prevent proper
grounding and cause an electric shock.

WARNING
Ch.3
• Always keep the power plug dry. A wet power plug may cause an electric shock.
• Confirm that the hospital-grade wall mains outlet to which this video system center
is connected has adequate electrical capacity that is larger than the total power
consumption of all connected equipment. If the capacity is insufficient, fire can
result or the circuit breaker may trip and turn OFF this video system center but also
all other equipment connected to the same power circuit.
• When using the mobile workstation (WM-NP2, WM-NP1, or WM-WP1), confirm
that the mobile workstation has adequate electrical capacity that is larger than the
total power consumption of all connected equipment. If the capacity is insufficient,
drop in the supply voltage can result or the electric protective device may trip and
turn OFF all the equipment connected to the mobile workstation.
• When nonmedical ancillary electrical equipment is used, always connect the
equipment to a wall mains outlet via an isolation transformer. Otherwise, an electric
shock can result.
• The total power consumption of all connected equipment to the isolation
transformer should not exceed the rating of the isolation transformer. If it exceeds,
add another isolation transformer. Otherwise, the equipment may not work
correctly.
• Do not put the isolation transformer on a floor. It can cause an electric shock, when
water is split to the floor.
• Do not connect two or more isolation transformer in series. It exceeds the rating of
the isolation transformer. Otherwise, the equipment may not work correctly.
• Do not bend, pull or twist the power cord. Equipment damage including separation
of the power plug and disconnection of the cord wire as well as an electric shock
can result.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 65


3.10 Connection to the AC mains power supply

WARNING
• Be sure to connect the power plug securely to prevent erroneous unplugging during
use. Otherwise, the equipment will not function.
• Do not extend a single wall mains outlet into multiple outlets for connecting the
power cords of both the electrosurgical unit and light source. Otherwise,
malfunction of the equipment may result.

 When the mobile workstation (WM-NP2, WM-NP1, or


WM-WP1) is used

1 Confirm that the video system center is OFF.

Ch.3 2 Connect the power cord provided with the mobile workstation to the AC power inlet of
the video system center and the power socket of the mobile workstation.

AC power inlet

Mobile workstation
This video system center

Power cord provided with the mobile workstation

Power cord provided with


Power socket the mobile workstation

to the wall
mains outlet
Power cord of the mobile workstation

Figure 3.18

66 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.10 Connection to the AC mains power supply

3 Connect the power cords provided with the mobile workstation to the AC power inlets
of the ancillary equipment and the power socket of the mobile workstation. (See
Figure 3.18)
4 Connect the power cord of the mobile workstation to the wall mains outlet.

 When a mobile workstation other than the WM-NP2,


WM-NP1, or WM-WP1 is used or when no mobile
workstation is used

1 Confirm that the video system center is OFF.


2 Connect the power cord provided with the video system center first to its AC power
inlet, then to the wall mains outlet.
Ch.3
3 Connect the instruments listed in Table 3.19 to the wall mains outlet (See
Figure 3.19).

Product name Model


Light source CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, CLV-S45, CLV-S40
Monitor OEV261H, OEV191H, OEV181H, OEV191
Video recorder IMH-20, IMH-10

Table 3.19 The devices to be connected directly to the wall mains outlet.

4 Connect the instruments listed in Table 3.20 to the isolation transformer (See
Figure 3.19).

Product name Model


Video recorder PDW-75MD, DVO-1000MDP
Video printer UP-21MDP, UP-25MDP
Monitor Other than OEV monitors

Table 3.20 The devices to be connected to the isolation transformer.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 67


3.10 Connection to the AC mains power supply

5 Connect the power cord of the isolation transformer to the wall mains outlet.

Devices to be connected directly to the hospital grade


power outlet Hospital grade
power outlet
Video system center

Light source

OEV monitor

Video recorder (IMH)

Devices to be connected to the isolation transformer


Isolation transformer
Monitor other than OEV
Ch.3 Video recorder (except IMH)

Video printer
MH-788,
MH-789

Figure 3.19

68 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


3.11 Connection to the LINK-IN terminal

3.11 Connection to the LINK-IN terminal

Connect to the equipment having the LINK-IN terminal (to the video system center)
using the cable in Table 3.21 as shown in Figure 3.20.

 Cable

Product name Model Note


Communication cable
MAJ-1915
(For system center) 1.8M
Use one of the cables.
Communication cable
MAJ-1949
(For system center) 10M
Ch.3
Table 3.21

 Connecting dagram

LIGHT SOURCE terminal

OTV

MAJ-1915, MAJ-1949

To the LINK-IN
terminal on the equipment
having the LINK-IN terminal

Figure 3.20

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 69


3.11 Connection to the LINK-IN terminal

Ch.3

70 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.1 Setup list

Chapter 4 Function setup

4.1 Setup list

This chapter explains the basic settings of the video system center and ancillary equipment for
appropriate use.
Turn ON the video system center before performing a setup.

Setup menu Category Explanation


System Setup System Set the basic functions of the video system center.
See Section 4.3, “System setup (system)” on page 79.
Connection setting Set connection of the ancillary equipment to the video system center.
See Section 4.4, “System setup (connection setting)” for the items to
set on page 88.
User settings Basic setup Set the display assistance of the observation image.
See Section 4.6, “User settings (basic setup)” on page 105. Ch.4
Switch presets Assign a desired function to each custom button, switch, and key.
See Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)” on page 117.
OSD customization Set the character display.
See Section 4.8, “User settings (OSD customization)” on page 124.
Color tone Adjust the color tone of the endoscopic image.
See Section 4.9, “User settings (Color tone)” on page 129.
Security settings Sets the security settings in the administrator menu.
See Section 4.10, “Security settings for administrators” on page 130.
Secure user registration Sets the secure user registration in the administrator menu.
See Section 4.11, “Secure user registration for administrators” on
page 138.
Password Sets the password.
See Section 4.12, “Password” on page 148.

Table 4.1

NOTE
Some settings can be performed without connecting the endoscope.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 71


4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

 Displaying the system setup screen

1 Press the “Menu” key on the keyboard or front panel: the menu list is displayed on the
monitor (see Figure 4.2).

“Enter” key “Menu” key

Ch.4 Arrow key

Figure 4.1

2 Select “Advanced menu” with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel and press
the “Enter” key.

Advanced menu

Figure 4.2

72 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

3 Select the “System setup” (see Figure 4.3) and press the “Enter” key: the “System
setup” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.4).

System setup

Figure 4.3

4 Select any operation from the operation menu below with the arrow keys on the
keyboard and press the “Enter” key. For the following operation, comply with the
instructions for the selected operation from the operation menu. Ch.4

Setup contents are displayed

3
4 5 6

Figure 4.4

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 73


4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

No Operation menu Explanation


1 System Edit the system setup.
2 Peripheral setting See “ Editing the system setup” on page 75.

3 End (Menu) Returns to the endoscopic image.


4 Back (Esc) Returns to the menu list.
5 Save (S) Save the system setup on the portable memory.
See “ Saving the system setup to the portable memory” on page 77.
6 Load (L) Load the system setup saved on the portable memory.
See “ Loading the system setup from the portable memory” on page 78.

Table 4.2

Ch.4

74 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

 Editing the system setup

The system setup is edited in this section.

1 Display the “System setup” screen as described in “ Displaying the system setup
screen” on page 72. (see Figure 4.5)
2 Select a category with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the
system setup screen of the selected category is displayed. For details on categories,
see Table 4.3.

Ch.4

Figure 4.5

No. Category Setting item


1 System • Date/time/comment • Output formats
Set the basic functions of the video system center. • Basic operation • NR
See Section 4.3, “System setup (system)” on • Record setting • Release time H
page 79.
• Printer • Release time S
2 Peripheral setting Peripheral setting
Set connection of the ancillary equipment to the video
system center.
See Section 4.4, “System setup (connection setting)”
on page 88.

Table 4.3

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 75


4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

3 Select a setting item to be changed with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the
setting value selection or direct entry become available. For each setting item and its
details, see the reference of the category in Table 4.3.

Setting tab

Setting items

Setting values

Figure 4.6

Ch.4
4 Select or directly enter the desired setting value.

NOTE
Setting items may be categorized by tabs. Select any tab with the arrow keys on
the keyboard to display the items to be set as necessary.

5 Repeat Step 3 to 4 to set other setting items that need to be changed.


6 Select the “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: a confirmation
message box is displayed.
7 Select the “Save” and press the “Enter” key: the edited system setup is saved, and
the endoscopic image screen is displayed.

NOTE
• When selecting the “Delete” and pressing the “Enter” key, the data is deleted and
the endoscopic image screen is displayed.
• When the error message is displayed, confirm that the entered data is correct.
• When the settings have not been changed, no confirmation message box is
displayed.

76 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

 Saving the system setup to the portable memory

The edited system setup is saved to the portable memory.


The system setup can be transferred to another OTV-S190 using the portable memory that the system
setup is saved on.

NOTE
Only one system setup can be saved in the portable memory. It is overwritten with
the system setup transferred from the video system center, and it cannot be
restored.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port in advance. For inserting
the portable memory, see “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory
port” on page 225.
2 Display the “System setup” screen as described in “ Displaying the system setup
screen” on page 72. (See Figure 4.7)
3 Select the “Save (S)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 4.7) and press the “Enter” key: a
Ch.4
confirmation message box is displayed.

Save (S)

Figure 4.7

4 Select the “Yes (Y)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key. The system setup
is saved to the portable memory, and the “System setup” screen is displayed.

NOTE
Select the “No” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key to return to the
“System setup” screen. The data is not saved to the portable memory.

5 Select the “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the
endoscopic image screen is displayed.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 77


4.2 Basic operation of the system setup

 Loading the system setup from the portable memory

The system setup saved on the portable memory is loaded to the video system center.

NOTE
Only one system setup can be saved in the portable memory. It is overwritten with
the system setup transferred from the video system center, and it cannot be
restored.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port in advance. For inserting
the portable memory, see “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory
port” on page 225.
2 Display the “System setup” screen as described in “ Displaying the system setup
screen” on page 72. (See Figure 4.8)
3 Select the “Load (L)” with the arrow keys (See Figure 4.8) and press the “Enter” key: a
confirmation message box is displayed.

Ch.4

Load (L)

Figure 4.8

4 Select the “Yes (Y)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the system setup is
loaded from the portable memory, and the “System setup” screen is displayed.

NOTE
Selecting the “No” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key return to the
“System setup” screen, and the data is not saved to the portable memory.

5 Select the “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the
endoscopic image screen is displayed.

78 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.3 System setup (system)

4.3 System setup (system)

This section explains setting items and setting values on each tab in the “System setup > System”
screen.
Enter the setting values as described in Section 4.2, “Basic operation of the system setup”.

1 2 3 4

Ch.4
5 6 7 8

Figure 4.9

No. Setting tab Reference


1 Date/comment See “ “Date/comment” tab” on page 80.
2 Operation See “ “Operation” tab” on page 82.
3 Record setting See “ “Record setting” tab” on page 83.
4 Printer See “ “Printer” tab” on page 84.
5 Output format See “ “Output format” tab” on page 84.
6 NR See “ “NR” tab” on page 86.
7 Release time H See “ “Release time H” tab” on page 86.
8 Release time S See“ “Release time S” tab” on page 87.

Table 4.4

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 79


4.3 System setup (system)

 “Date/comment” tab

The current date and time, display format of the date, and comments are set.

3 4

Figure 4.10

Setting
Ch.4 No.
item
Setting value Note

1 Date format YYYY/MM/DD This operation sets the display format of the
YYYY-MM-DD current date and time in an endoscopic image.
YYYY.MM.DD Display format for the system date
YYYY MM DD YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: day
MM/DD/YYYY
MM-DD-YYYY
MM.DD.YYYY
MM DD YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
DD-MM-YYYY
DD.MM.YYYY
DD MM YYYY
2 Date Select the date with the arrow keys. The date that can be entered is from 1/1/2006 to
31/12/2087.
3 Time Select the time with the arrow keys. The built-in clock of this video system center
may gain or lose some time during use. If this
happens, reenter the correct time.
4 Retain data ON Set the patient data and comments to be cleared
OFF or not by turning ON or OFF the video system
center during non examination.
5 Default Enter the comments by the keyboard directly. Any comments displayed following the
“Comments:” can be entered.

Table 4.5

80 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.3 System setup (system)

 Comment display

Comment

Figure 4.11

Ch.4

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 81


4.3 System setup (system)

 “Operation” tab

The timings of starting and terminating an examination are set.

1
2

Figure 4.12

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 OTV power OFF ON The examination is terminated when the video system center is
turned OFF.
OFF The examination is not terminated when the video system center is
turned OFF.
2 Scope removal ON The examination is terminated when the endoscope is
disconnected.
OFF The examination is not terminated when the endoscope is
disconnected.
3 Record ON The examination starts when recording starts.
OFF The examination does not start when recording starts.

Table 4.6

NOTE
If the examination is terminated at the same time as withdrawal of the endoscope
or turning OFF the video system center, the patient data is deleted from the screen,
and the saving folder of endoscopic images is changed to another one.

82 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.3 System setup (system)

 “Record setting” tab

The conditions that the frozen image is saved to the digital file are set.

NOTE
The conditions cannot be changed during an examination.

Ch.4
Figure 4.13

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 Record format JPEG (1/10) Save the data compressed into approx. 1/10 size as a JPEG file.
JPEG (1/5) Save the data compressed into approx. 1/5 size as a JPEG file.
TIFF Save the data as a TIFF file (noncompression).
Note:
Set the saving format when a frozen image is saved to the image filing system.
2 Patient data ON Add the patient data when recording the images.
OFF Not add the patient data when recording the images.
3 Folder form DCF Saves the data in DCF format.
Date and ID Saves the data by examination date and patient ID.
Note:
Select the folder format to save the data on the portable memory.
Only half-width characters can be used for a folder name.
When other characters and symbols (“/” “:” “*” “?” “” ” “<” “>” “|” “#” “%”) are used for a
patient ID, those characters are converted to “_” (under score)”.
4 Scope image HD&SD Record the HDTV and SDTV images.
(Recording image HD Record the HDTV images.
to memory)
SD Record the SDTV images.
OFF Record no images.
Note:
Set the portable memory to the destination of either the HDTV or SDTV image file.

Table 4.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 83


4.3 System setup (system)

 “Printer” tab

The video printer is set up.

Figure 4.14

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Check captured image ON The video printer output image is displayed for 3 seconds
automatically when an image is captured in the video printer.
OFF The video printer output image is not displayed automatically
when an image is captured in the video printer.

Table 4.8

 “Output format” tab

The definition of the picture output and the HD aspect ratio are set.

Figure 4.15

84 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.3 System setup (system)

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 SDI output HDTV Output the HDTV video signal.
SDTV Output the SDTV video signal.
Note:
Select the RGB output signal format of the BNC 1 and BNC 2 terminal.
2 DVI output 1080 P Output the 1920 × 1080 (1080 p) video signal.
1920 × 1200 Output the 1920 × 1200 video signal.
1280 × 1024 Output the 1280 × 1024 video signal.
Note:
Select the output signal format of the DVI output terminal.
3 Monitor output SDTV Output the SDTV video signal.
HDTV (RGB) Output the HDTV (RGB) video signal.
HDTV (YPbPr) Output the HDTV (YPbPr) video signal.
Note:
Select the output signal format of the monitor terminal. When the “YPbPr” is set, the input
setting of the connected equipment needs to be change. For more details, refer to the
instruction manual for the equipment.
4 Printer output SDTV Output the SDTV video signal.
Ch.4
HDTV (RGB) Output the HDTV (RGB) video signal.
HDTV (YPbPr) Output the HDTV (YPbPr) video signal.
Note:
Select the output signal format of the printer terminal. When the “YPbPr” is set, the input
setting of the connected equipment needs to be change. For more details, refer to the
instruction manual for the equipment
5 Aspect ratio 16:10 Set the aspect ratio of HDTV monitor to 16:10
16:9 Set the aspect ratio of HDTV monitor to 16:9
4:3 Set the aspect ratio of HDTV monitor to 4:3
5:4 Set the aspect ratio of HDTV monitor to 5:4

Table 4.9

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 85


4.3 System setup (system)

 “NR” tab

The noise reduction is set in this section.

Figure 4.16

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 NR ON Enable the noise reduction function.
OFF Disable the noise reduction function.

Table 4.10

 “Release time H” tab

The length of time to pause the live endoscopic image during release (release time) can be set for
each connected equipment. This section explains setting of the HDTV signals.
The actual release time is the longest one of all the equipment’s release time settings.

1
2

Figure 4.17

86 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.3 System setup (system)

No. Setting item Setting value (sec) Explanation


1 Memory 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 Set the freeze time from 0.5 to 2 seconds.
2 Printer 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Set the freeze time from 0.5 to 9 seconds.
3 DF device 0.1, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Set the freeze time from 0.1 to 9 seconds.
4 ENDOALPHA 0.1, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 Set the freeze time from 0.1 to 2 seconds.

Table 4.11

 “Release time S” tab

The length of time to pause the live endoscopic image during release (release time) can be set for
each connected equipment. This section explains setting of the SDTV signals.
The actual release time is the longest one of all the equipment’s release time settings.

1
2 Ch.4

3
4

Figure 4.18

No. Setting item Setting value (sec) Explanation


1 Memory 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 Set the freeze time from 0.5 to 2 seconds.
2 Printer 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Set the freeze time from 0.5 to 9 seconds.
3 DF device 0.1, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Set the freeze time from 0.1 to 9 seconds.
4 ENDOALPHA 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2 Set the freeze time from 0.5 to 2 seconds.

Table 4.12

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 87


4.4 System setup (connection setting)

4.4 System setup (connection setting)

The equipment to be connected to the video system center is set in this section.

 Connection setting

The monitor or DVR is set in this section.

1 5

3 6

4 7
Ch.4

Figure 4.19

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 Type OEV261H SDI1 Use the OEV261H and connect the video
(Monitor) system center to the SDI-1 terminal.
SDI2 Use the OEV261H and connect the video
system center to the SDI-2 terminal.
DVI-COMP1 Use the OEV261H and connect the video
system center to the DVI-D1 terminal.
DVI-VIDEO2 Use the OEV261H and connect the video
system center to the DVI-D2 terminal.
RGB-VIDEO Use the OEV261H and connect the video
system center to the RGB terminal.
Y/C Use the OEV261H and connect the video
system center to the Y/C terminal.
VIDEO Use the OEV261H and connect the video
system center to the VIDEO terminal.
HD15 Use the OEV261H and connect the video
system center to the HD15 terminal.
No remote The monitor remote control function is disabled.

88 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.4 System setup (connection setting)

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


2 Output select – The setting value selected in “Type” is displayed.
3 Keyboard MAJ-1924 Select when connecting the MAJ-1924.
MAJ-1921 Select when connecting the MAJ-1921.
MAJ-1922 Select when connecting the MAJ-1922.
4 Lamp type Xenon Select when the xenon lamp light source, such as the CLV-180,
CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, CLV-S45, or CLV-S40 is connected to the
video system center.
Halogen Select when the halogen lamp light source is connected to the video
system center.
Note:
The lamp type is set automatically when connecting the CLV-S190 or CLV-S40Pro to the
video system center.
Set the light source as below according to the instruction manual for the light source
when the light source except for the CLV-180, CLV-S190, CLVS40Pro, CLV-S45, or
CLV-S40 is used.
Brightness mode button: “Automatically”
Brightness level: median of the adjustment range.
5 Type Remote Remotely control the printer.
(Remote of the
Ch.4
None The printer remote control function is disabled.
printer)
6 Type Remote Remotely control the digital filing system.
(Remote of the None The digital filling system remote control function is disabled.
digital filing system)
7 Type Remote Remotely control the DVR.
(Remote of the None The DVR remote control function is disabled.
DVR)

Table 4.13

CAUTION
If the lamp type is set differently from that of the connected light source, color
and/or brightness of the endoscopic image may not be correct and the endoscopic
observation may not be performed properly.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 89


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

Each function can be set by each user or each endoscope. The setup can store up to 20 sets of user
setup data.

 Displaying the user settings screen

1 Press the “Menu” key on the keyboard or front panel (see Figure 4.20): the menu list
is displayed on the monitor (see Figure 4.21).

“Enter” key “Menu” key

Ch.4


Arrow keys

Figure 4.20

2 Select the “User settings” with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel (see
Figure 4.21) and press the “Enter” key: the “Select user” screen is displayed (see
Figure 4.22).

User settings

Figure 4.21

90 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

3 Select any operation in Table 4.14 and press the “Enter” key.
Follow the instructions for the selected operation.

Figure 4.22

Menu Explanation
End (Menu) Return to the endoscopic image display.
Ch.4
Back (Esc) Return to the menu list (see Figure 4.21).
Select (S) Call the registered user setup.
See Section 6.6, “Recall of user settings data” on page 178.
Edit (E) Edit the user setup.
See “ Editing and new registering the user settings” on page 92.

Table 4.14

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 91


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

 Editing and new registering the user settings

The user settings is edited or registered newly.

1 Display the “Select user” screen as described in “ Displaying the user settings
screen” on page 90. (see Figure 4.23)
2 Select the “Edit (E)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 4.23) and press the “Enter” key:
the “Select user > Edit” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.24).

Edit (E)

Ch.4

Figure 4.23

3 Select the “Input (I)” and user ID to be edited with the arrow keys (see Figure 4.24)
and press the “Enter” key: the “Select user > Edit > Input” screen is displayed (see
Figure 4.25).

Input (I)

Figure 4.24

92 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

4 When setting the user name, select the text box of the user name with the arrow keys,
enter the user name directly, and edit the data.

Category buttons

Operation buttons

Figure 4.25

NOTE
• When registering new user settings data, always start with entering the user name.
Other items cannot be entered. Ch.4
• Up to 20 characters can be entered.

5 Select any operation in Table 4.15 and press the “Enter” key.
For the following operation, see Table 4.15.

Operation button Explanation


Basic setup Set the display assistance of the observation image according to Step 6.
See “User settings (basic setup)” on page 105.
Switch presets Assign a desired function to each custom button, switch, and key according to Step 6.
See Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.
OSD customization Set the character display according to Step 6.
See Section 4.8, “User settings (OSD customization)”.
Color tone Adjust the color tone of endoscopic image according to Step 6.
See Section 4.9, “User settings (Color tone)”.
End (Menu) Select the setting value in the item field.
Back (Esc) Return to the menu list. (see Figure 4.21)
Next Save the setup under editing and set the next new user’s data.
Copy Save the setup under editing and duplicate it to set the next new user’s data.
Reset Cancel the setup under editing and return to the previous setup.

Table 4.15

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 93


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

6 Select a setting item to be changed with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the
setting value selection or direct entry becomes available. For each setting item and its
details, see each reference of the setting item shown in Table 4.15.

Ex: the category is “Observation setup”.

Figure 4.26

Ch.4
7 Select or directly enter the setting value to change.

NOTE
Setting items may be categorized by tabs. Select any tab with the arrow keys on
the keyboard to display the items to be set as necessary.

8 Select “Back (Esc)” and press the “Enter” key when setting another category following
the completion of settings of the current category: the “Select user > Edit > Input”
screen is displayed, and settings of another category becomes available.
9 Repeat Step 6 to 8 to set all setting items that need to be changed.
10 After completion of all settings, select “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the
“Enter” key: a confirmation message box is displayed.
11 Select the “Save” and press the “Enter” key: the changes are reflected in the user
settings, and the endoscopic image screen is displayed.

94 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

NOTE
• The next user setup can be set continuously. Select the “Next entry”, not the “End
(Menu)”, and press the “Enter” key. When a confirmation message box is displayed
and selecting “Yes” on the message box, the user setup being set is saved, and an
unregistered user ID screen is displayed.
• The next user setup can be set continuously on the basis of the current setup.
Select the “Copy”, not the “End (Menu)”, and press the “Enter” key. When a
confirmation message box is displayed and selecting “Yes” on the message box,
the user setup being set is saved, and the copied setup is pasted on an
unregistered user ID screen.
• When selecting the “Reset” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key, all
setting values except for the user names return to the default setting.
• When selecting the “Delete” on the confirmation message box and pressing the
“Enter” key, the entered data is deleted, and the endoscopic image screen is
displayed.
• When the error message is displayed, confirm that the entered data is correct.
• When no setting change is performed, a confirmation message box is not
Ch.4
displayed.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 95


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

 Deleting the user settings

When deleting a user name, follow the operations below.

1 Display the “Select user” screen as described in “ Displaying the user settings
screen” on page 90. (see Figure 4.27)
2 Select the “Edit (E)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 4.27) and press the “Enter” key
on the keyboard: “Select user > Edit” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.28).

Edit (E)

Ch.4

Figure 4.27

3 Select the “Delete (Del)” and user ID to be edited with the arrow keys (see
Figure 4.28) and press the “Enter” key: a confirmation message box is displayed.

Delete (Del)

Figure 4.28

4 Select the “Yes” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the selected user
setup is deleted and a message of “(No Data)” is displayed.

96 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

NOTE
Select the “No” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the data is not
deleted.

5 When deleting another user ID, repeat Steps 2 and 3.


6 Select the “End (Menu)” and press the “Enter” key: the endoscopic image screen is
displayed.

 Saving the user settings to the portable memory

The new registered or edited user settings are saved on the portable memory.
The user settings can be transferred to the OTV-S190 using the portable memory that the user settings
are saved in.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port. For inserting the portable
memory, see “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on
Ch.4
page 225.
2 Display the “Select user” screen as described in “ Displaying the user settings
screen” on page 90. (See Figure 4.29)
3 Select the “Edit (E)” with the arrow keys (See Figure 4.29) and press the “Enter” key:
the “Select user > Edit” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.30).

Edit (E)

Figure 4.29

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 97


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

4 Select the “Save/Load (S)” with the arrow keys (See Figure 4.30) and press the
“Enter” key: the “Select user > Edit > Save/Load” screen is displayed (see
Figure 4.31).

Save/Load (S)

Figure 4.30

5 Select the “Save (S)” and desired user ID and press the “Enter” key: the user ID is
selected.
Ch.4
User ID

Save (S)

Figure 4.31

NOTE
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all user IDs.
• Pressing the “Enter” key while selecting the user setup releases the selection.

6 When saving several user IDs, select them as well.

98 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

7 Select the “Enter (R)” (see Figure 4.32) and press the “Enter” key after selecting the
user ID to be saved: the “Select user > Edit > Save > Save to” screen is displayed
(see Figure 4.33).

Enter (R)

Figure 4.32

8 Select the “Save (S)” and desired user ID box that the user ID will be saved to and
press the “Enter” key: the user ID box is selected.
Ch.4
Saving destination in the PM

Save (S)

Enter (R)

Figure 4.33

NOTE
• Confirm that there are no necessary user settings in the portable memory. It is
overwritten with the user setup transferred from the video system center, and it
cannot be restored.
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all user IDs.
• Pressing the “Enter” key while selecting the user setup releases the selection.

9 When saving several user IDs, select them as well.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 99


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

NOTE
• The number of the saving destinations needs to be equal to the number of the user
IDs having been selected in the “Select user > Edit > Save > Save/Load” screen.
• The number of the saving destinations and the number of the user IDs are
displayed in the screen. (See Figure 4.33)

10 Select the “Enter (R)” (see Figure 4.33) and press the “Enter” key when selecting
more user ID boxes than user IDs to be saved: a confirmation message box is
displayed.
11 Select the “Yes” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the user settings are
saved to the portable memory, and the “Select user > Edit” screen is displayed.

NOTE
Select the “No” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key to return to the
“Select user > Edit > Save > Save to” screen. The data is not saved to the portable
memory.
Ch.4
12 Select the “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the
endoscopic image screen is displayed.

NOTE
Selecting the “Back (Esc)” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key return
to the previous screen.

 Loading the user settings from the portable memory

The user settings saved on the portable memory can be loaded to the video system center.

NOTE
Confirm that there are no necessary user settings in the video system center. It is
overwritten with the user setup transferred from the portable memory, and it cannot
be restored.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port. For inserting the portable
memory, see “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on
page 225.

100 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

2 Display the “Select user” screen as described in “ Displaying the user settings
screen” on page 90.(see Figure 4.34)
3 Select the “Edit (E)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 4.34) and press the “Enter” key:
the “Select user > Edit” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.35).

Edit (E)

Figure 4.34

4 Select the “Save/Load (S)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 4.35) and press the
Ch.4
“Enter” key: “Select user > Edit > Save/Load” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.36).

Save/Load (S)

Figure 4.35

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 101


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

5 Select the “Load (L)” with the arrow keys: the user ID list is changed to the one saved
in the portable memory.

User ID

Load (L)

Figure 4.36

6 Select the desired user ID and press the “Enter” key: the user ID is selected.

Ch.4 Selected user ID

Enter (R)

Figure 4.37

NOTE
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all user IDs.
• Pressing the “Enter” key while selecting the user setup releases the selection.

7 When loading several user IDs, select them as well.


8 Select the “Enter (R)” and press the “Enter” key after selecting all user IDs to be load:
the “Select user > Edit > Load > Load to” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.38).

102 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

9 Select the “Load (L)” and user ID box that the user IDs will be load to and press the
“Enter” key: the user ID box is selected.

User ID box

Load (L)

Figure 4.38

NOTE
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all user IDs. Ch.4
• Pressing the “Enter” key while selecting the user setup releases the selection.

10 When loading several user IDs, select them as well.

NOTE
The saving destinations need to be selected the same number of the user IDs
selected in the “Select user > Edit > Load > Save/Load” screen. The number of
them is displayed on the monitor.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 103


4.5 Basic operation of the user settings

11 Select the “Enter (R)” and press the “Enter” key when selecting more user ID boxes
than user IDs to be load: a confirmation message box is displayed. The number of the
saving destinations and the number of the user IDs are displayed in the screen.

User ID box

Enter (R)

Figure 4.39

12 Select the “Yes (Y)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the user settings
Ch.4 are loaded from the portable memory, and the “Select user > Edit” screen is
displayed.

NOTE
Select the “No” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key to return to the
“Select user > Edit > Load > Load to” screen. The data is not loaded from the
portable memory.

13 Select the “End (Menu)” and press the “Enter” key: the endoscopic image screen is
displayed.

NOTE
Selecting the “Back (Esc)” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key return
to the previous screen.

104 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

4.6 User settings (basic setup)

The display assistant settings of endoscopic images are set as described in Section 4.5, “Basic
operation of the user settings”.

1 2 3 4

Ch.4
5 6 7

Figure 4.40

No. Setting tab Reference


1 Release 1 See “ “Release 1” tab” on page 106.
2 Release 2 See “ “Release 2” tab” on page 107.
3 PIP/POP See “ “PIP/POP” tab” on page 108.
4 Enhancement See “ “Enhancement” tab” on page 110.
5 Color/Bright. See “ “Color/Bright.” tab” on page 112.
6 Observation 1 See “ “Observation 1” tab” on page 114.
7 Observation 2 See “ “Observation 2” tab” on page 116.

Table 4.16

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 105


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 “Release 1” tab

When operating the release 1, equipment that records the frozen images is set.

Figure 4.41

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Memory ON The images obtained by releasing are saved to the portable memory.
OFF The images obtained by releasing are not saved to the portable memory.
2 Printer ON The images obtained by releasing are saved to the printer.
OFF The images obtained by releasing are not saved to the printer.
3 DF device ON The images obtained by releasing are saved to the filing system.
OFF The images obtained by releasing are not saved to the filing system.

Table 4.17

NOTE
When “Memory” is set to “OFF”, the images are not saved to the internal buffer
either.

106 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 “Release 2” tab

When operating the release 2, equipment that records the frozen images is set.

Figure 4.42

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Memory ON The images obtained by releasing are saved to the portable memory.
OFF The images obtained by releasing are not saved to the portable memory.
2 Printer ON The images obtained by releasing are saved to the printer.
OFF The images obtained by releasing are not saved to the printer.
3 DF device ON The images obtained by releasing are saved to the filing system.
OFF The images obtained by releasing are not saved to the filing system.

Table 4.18

NOTE
When “Memory” is set to “OFF”, the images are not saved to the internal buffer
either.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 107


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 “PIP/POP” tab

The settings of PIP and POP are set in this section.

4
1
5
2

Figure 4.43

Ch.4

108 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 PIP/POP PIP Display the screen in PIP mode.
POP Display the screen in POP mode.
2 Retain state ON The previous PIP/POP display is retained.
OFF The previous PIP/POP display is not retained.
3 OEV261H SDI1 Display the image from the video system center connected to the
SDI-1 terminal on the OEV261H preferentially.
SDI2 Display the image from the video system center connected to the
SDI-2 terminal on the OEV261H preferentially.
DVI-COMP1 Display the image from the video system center connected to the
DVI-D1 terminal on the OEV261H preferentially.
DVI-VIDEO2 Display the image from the video system center connected to the
DVI-D2 terminal on the OEV261H preferentially.
RGB-VIDEO Display the image from the video system center connected to the
RGB terminal on the OEV261H preferentially.
Y/C Display the image from the video system center connected to the Y/C
terminal on the OEV261H preferentially.
VIDEO Display the image from the video system center connected to the
VIDEO terminal on the OEV261H preferentially. Ch.4
HD15 Display the image from the video system center connected to the
HD15 terminal on the OEV261H preferentially.
Note:
Set the input equipment to display the selected sub-images from the OEV261H.
4 PIP position Upper left Display the sub-image at the upper left of the screen.
Upper right Display the sub-image at the upper right of the screen.
Lower left Display the sub-image at the lower left of the screen.
Lower right Display the sub-image at the lower right of the screen.
5 Sub screen size Large Display the large sub-image.
Small Display the small sub-image.

Table 4.19

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 109


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 “Enhancement” tab

The settings of structure enhancement and edge enhancement are set in this section.

1 2

Figure 4.44

Ch.4

110 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 WLI mode1, A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, Structure enhancement A
WLI mode2, A5, A6, A7, A8 The structure enhancement enhances the contrast of the fine patterns
WLI mode3 in the image (a larger value increases the enhancement level).
B0, B1, B2, B3, B4, Structure enhancement B
B5, B6, B7, B8 The structure enhancement enhances the contrast of more finer
patterns than A in the image (a larger value increases the
enhancement level).
E0, E1, E2, E3, E4, Edge enhancement
E5, E6, E7, E8 The edge enhancement enhances the edge of the endoscopic image
and increase its sharpness (enhancement level is increased with the
setting value).
Note:
Any setting value can be assigned to the enhancement mode 1 to 3 in the WLI observation
mode.
2 NBI mode1, A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, Structure enhancement A
NBI mode2, A5, A6, A7, A8 The structure enhancement enhances the contrast of the fine patterns
NBI mode3 in the image (a larger value increases the enhancement level).
B0, B1, B2, B3, B4, Structure enhancement B
B5, B6, B7, B8 The structure enhancement enhances the contrast of more finer Ch.4
patterns than A in the image (a larger value increases the
enhancement level).
E0, E1, E2, E3, E4, Edge enhancement
E5, E6, E7, E8 The edge enhancement enhances the edge of the endoscopic image
and increase its sharpness (enhancement level is increased with the
setting value).
Note:
Any setting value can be assigned to the enhancement mode 1 to 3 in the NBI observation
mode.

Table 4.20

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 111


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 “Color/Bright.” tab

The settings of the image colors and brightness are set.

1 6

2
7

8
4

Figure 4.45

Ch.4

112 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 Contrast HIGH The contrast is changed from “NORMAL” to “HIGH”.
LOW The contrast is changed from “NORMAL” to “LOW”.
2 Elec. shutter ON Activates the electronic shutter function.
OFF Deactivates the electronic shutter function.
Note:
When using an endoscope not compatible with the electronic shutter function of the video
system center, the electronic shutter function does not work even if “ON” is selected.
3 PDD gain PDD1 Set the observation mode to the PDD1 blue mode.
PDD2 Set the observation mode brighter than the PDD1 blue mode.
4 Color mode Mode 1 Standard color mode.
Mode 2 Less reddish color than the Mode 1.
Mode 3 More yellowish color than the Mode 1.
Note:
The selected SP color mode is indicated “Cm: x” in the endoscopic image screen.
5 Mode Auto  Average The iris mode is changed between “Auto” and “Ave.”.
(Iris) Auto Peak The iris mode is changed between “Auto” and “Peak”.
Average Auto The iris mode is changed between “Ave.” and “Auto”. Ch.4
Average  Peak The iris mode is changed between “Ave.” and “Peak”.
Peak  Auto The iris mode is changed between “Peak” and “Auto”.
Peak  Average The iris mode is changed between “Peak” and “Ave.”.
6 Iris area Mask The exposure area is set automatically according to the image size.
Center Center-weighted measuring.
Full The brightness of the whole image is measured.
Note:
 The exposure area can be changed only when the setting value of the “Iris” is set to
“Auto”.
 “Mask” becomes the same with “Full” for endoscopes of LTF-V3/VP, A500**A series,
and WA500*A series.
7 AGC ON Enable the AGC mode.
OFF Disable the AGC mode.
Note:
Interference may appear in the image when the AGC function is ON.
8 MAX gain +6, +9, +12 Set the maximum gain. As the maximum gain is increased, noise will
increase in the endoscopic image.

Table 4.21

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 113


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 “Observation 1” tab

The freeze function and preset of the OEV261H are set.

Figure 4.46

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Scan level 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 The large setting value can decrease blur/color shift of the image,
but an interval to display the frozen image becomes longer.
Note:
The image with the least rainbow color is selected from the images captured in the set time
period. Increasing the setting value extends the time period, making a larger number of
images available for selection. (See Figure 4.47)
2 Invert display ON Displays the endoscopic image rotated by 180 on the monitor.
OFF Displays the endoscopic image on the monitor normally.
Note:
• The orientation display is shown in Figure 4.48.
• The images output to ancillary equipment, such as the video printer are also rotated
images.
• The orientation setup affects all video outputs as well as the monitor output. The recorded
images are also reversed. The external PIP image does not reverse.
3 Preset PRESET A - PRESET The setting value of the OEV261H is changed by remotely
J, USER 1 - USER 20 controlling. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
OEV261H.

Table 4.22

114 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 Scan level

Freezing (reference)
Setting [7]

Setting [1]

Time
1.0 sec. 0.1 sec.
before before

The image with the least blur within each period


will be displayed.

Figure 4.47

 Invert display
Ch.4

R mark

OFF (normal image) ON (rotated image)

Figure 4.48

CAUTION
Please note that a time delay of the image display might occur during image
rotation. Please deal appropriately.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 115


4.6 User settings (basic setup)

 “Observation 2” tab

The settings of endoscopic image display is set in this section.

5
1

Figure 4.49

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 HD Large  Large The endoscopic image size is not changed.
Large Small The endoscopic image size is changed between “Large” and
“Small”. The default setting is “Large”.
Small Large The endoscopic image size is changed between “Small” and
“Large”. The default setting is “Small”.
Small  Small The endoscopic image size is not changed.
2 SD Large  Large The endoscopic image size is not changed.
Large  Small The endoscopic image size is changed between “Large” and
“Small”. The default setting is “Large”.
Small  Large The endoscopic image size is changed between “Small” and
“Large”. The default setting is “Small”.
Small  Small The endoscopic image size is not changed.
3 Display time 2 sec Displays the index image for 2 seconds.
4 sec Displays the index image for 4 seconds.
Always Displays the index image all the time.
Note:
• This setting is available only when the index display number is set to “1”.
• The index image may overlap the characters.
4 No. of images OFF No index image is shown in the endoscopic image.
1 image One index image is shown in the endoscopic image.
5 HD4:3 mode ON Change the aspect ratio of HDTV to 4-3 when releasing.
OFF Not change the aspect ratio of HDTV to 4-3 when releasing.

Table 4.23

116 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.7 User settings (switch presets)

 Index display
CAUTION
The index images are only for references. Do not use them for diagnosis purpose.

4.7 User settings (switch presets)

Set setting items and setting values in each setting tab of the user settings as described in Section 4.5,
“Basic operation of the user settings”.

NOTE
The same function can be assigned to different custom switches at the same time.

 “Scope switch” tab Ch.4

The functions are assigned to the remote switches 1 to 4 on the endoscope. For the
functions to be assigned, see Table 4.24 on page 122.

Figure 4.50

NOTE
The positions and shapes of the scope switches are different depending on the
endoscope model. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the endoscope to
be used.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 117


4.7 User settings (switch presets)

 “Front panel” tab

The functions are assigned to the “Custom” button 1 and 2 on the front panel. For the
functions to be assigned, see Table 4.24.

NOTE
“UCES option” cannot be assigned to the “Custom” button.

Ch.4

Figure 4.51

118 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.7 User settings (switch presets)

 “Keyboard” tab

The functions are assigned to the “CUSTOM” key A to D on the keyboard. For the
functions to be assigned, see Table 4.24.

NOTE
“UCES option” cannot be assigned to the “Custom” button.

Ch.4

Figure 4.52

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 119


4.7 User settings (switch presets)

 “Foot switch” tab

The functions are assigned to the foot switches 1 and 2 (MAJ-1391) connected to the
video system center and light source. For the functions to be assigned, see
Table 4.24.

NOTE
“UCES option” cannot be assigned to the “Custom” button.

Ch.4

Figure 4.53

120 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.7 User settings (switch presets)

 Setting value of custom switch function

Group Setting value Explanation


Not configured No function assigned
Observation Freeze Toggle the endoscopic image between a live image and a frozen image. Same
function as “FREEZE” key on the keyboard.
See “ Freeze” on page 204.
Release 1 Record the images on the monitor into the recording devices. Same function as
“RELEASE” key on the keyboard.
See Section 7.10, “Recording the frozen image (releasing)” on page 222.
Release 2 Record the images on the monitor into the recording devices.
See Section 7.10 on page 222.
Capture Capture the endoscopic images to the video printer.
See Section 7.13, “Remotely controlling the video printer” on page 254.
Zoom Enlarge the image. Same function as the zoom button on the front panel.
See “ Electronic zoom function” on page 203.
Other Image size Change the image size. Same function as the “IMAGE SIZE” key on the
keyboard.
See “ Image size” on page 205. Ch.4
Enhancement Switch the image enhancement mode. Same function as the image
enhancement mode button on the front panel.
See “ Image enhancement” on page 198.
Contrast Switch the contrast of the endoscopic image. Same function as the
“CONTRAST” key on the keyboard.
See “ Contrast mode” on page 199.
Noise reduction Switch the noise reduction mode of the endoscopic image.
See “ Noise reduction” on page 200
Fn options For future system expansion. Currently not used.
Opt. digital NBI Switch the observation mode between the normal light observation and NBI.
See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on page 215.
PDD This function is unavailable.
See Section 7.9 on page 215.
PDD gain This function is unavailable.
See Section 7.9 on page 215.
Ob. mode Switch the observation mode in order of NBI, PDD, and WLI.
See Section 7.9 on page 215.
NBI color mode Change the NBI color mode of the endoscopic image in the NBI observation.
See “ NBI color mode” on page 218.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 121


4.7 User settings (switch presets)

Group Setting value Explanation


PIP /POP PIP/POP Switch to the PIP or POP display. Same function as the “PIP” button on the front
display panel.
See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
PIP/POP layout Change the PIP or POP display mode.
See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
External source Change the external PIP or POP image.
See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
Subscreen size Change the size of sub-image in the PIP mode.
See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
PIP/POP Change the PIP or POP display mode including function OFF mode in order.
See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
Brightness Iris Switch to the iris mode. Same function as the iris mode button on the front panel.
See “ Iris mode” on page 190.
AGC Toggle the endoscopic image between ON and OFF.
See “ Automatic gain control (AGC)” on page 197.
Elec. shutter Turn the electronic shutter function ON and OFF.
See “ Electronic shutter” on page 196.
Brightness (+) Increase the brightness of the image.
Ch.4 See “ Brightness” on page 191.
Brightness (–) Decrease the brightness of the image.
See “ Brightness” on page 191.
Iris area Change the exposure area of the auto brightness control.
See “ Exposure area” on page 195.
Display Add data Erase and display the patient data on the monitor. Same function as the “ADD
DATA” key on the keyboard.
See “ Clearing characters from the screen” on page 206.
OEV output Change the output image on the OEV261H.
See “ Image source of the monitor” on page 260.
OEV-FLIP Change the endoscopic image to the rotated or mirror-reversed image.
See “ FLIP function” on page 261.
Settings White balance Press and hold to execute the white balance adjustment.
See Section 6.5, “White balance adjustment” on page 175.
Image display
Thumb. display Display the thumbnail images.
User settings Display the “User settings” screen.
Peripherals Light Switch the examination light of the light source ON/OFF.
This function works only in combination with CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, CLV-180.
Short press: turning ON; long press: turning OFF (this is the same as the lamp
button of the light source).
DVR Operate either DVR recording or pause.
See Section 7.12, “Remotely controlling the DVR” on page 251.
UCES option Send signals to the EndoALPHA.
Table 4.24

122 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.7 User settings (switch presets)

NOTE
The functions to be assigned are grouped as shown in Table 4.24, and these are
displayed in the screen shown in Figure 4.54 below.

Group Display the setting values in a selected group.

Setting values
Ch.4
Figure 4.54

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 123


4.8 User settings (OSD customization)

4.8 User settings (OSD customization)

Set setting items and setting values in each setting tab of the user settings (OSD customization) as
described in Section 4.5, “Basic operation of the user settings”.

 “OSD” tab

Character display is set in this section.

3
Ch.4
4

Figure 4.55

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 Retain setting ON The previous character display setup is recalled when turning ON
the video system center.
OFF The previous character display setup is not recalled when turning
ON the video system center.
2 Start Exam. Display all All character information is displayed when the examination starts.
Clear all No character information is displayed when the examination starts.
Partial The character information is displayed in a mode selected from
omission modes at the examination start.
Retain settings The character display setup is kept after starting an examination.
3 Partial mode Partial 1 The character information is displayed in the partial1 mode.
Partial 2 The character information is displayed in the partial 2 mode.
Partial 3 The character information is displayed in the partial 3 mode.
Custom The character information is displayed in the custom mode.

124 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.8 User settings (OSD customization)

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


4 Display time Always The status icons are not displayed.
4 sec The “” icon is displayed for 4 seconds. Other status icons are
always displayed.
OFF The status icons are always displayed.
Table 4.25

 Clearing characters mode and text information item

Full
Text information item All clear Clear 1 Clear 2 Clear 3 Custom
display
ID No.  –   – 
Name  –   – 
Sex  – – – – 
Age  – – – – 
D.O.B.  – – – – 
Date  –  – – 
Time  – – – –  Ch.4
D.F. counter*1  –   – 
CVP counter*2  –  – – 
Memory  –   – 
Enhancement level (structure
 – – – – 
and edge)
Color mode  – – – – 
Electronic zoom level*3      
Comment  –  –  
Cursor  – – –  
Orientation  –   – 
*4
Observation mode indicator  –   – 
 Display – Clear  Optional setting

Table 4.26

*1 Not displayed when the setting value of the digital filing system is set to "None".
*2 Not displayed when the setting value of the printer is set to "None".
*3 Not displayed when the zoom ratio is “×1.0”.
*4 Not displayed in the WLI observation mode.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 125


4.8 User settings (OSD customization)

 “Custom disp 1” tab

Patient and/or examination information are set whether to be displayed or not on the endoscopic
image display when the clearing character mode is set to the custom mode.

1
6
2 7

8
5

Figure 4.56

Ch.4 No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 Patient ID ON Display the patient ID.
OFF Not display the patient ID.
2 Patient name ON Display the patient names.
OFF Not display the patient names.
3 Sex ON Display the sex.
OFF Not display the sex.
4 Age ON Display the age.
OFF Not display the age.
5 DOB ON Display the birth date.
OFF Not display the birth date.
6 Date ON Display the date.
OFF Not display the date.
7 Time ON Display the time.
OFF Not display the time
8 Comment ON Display the comment.
OFF Not display the comment.

Table 4.27

126 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.8 User settings (OSD customization)

 “Custom disp 2” tab

Set equipment information whether to be displayed or not on the endoscopic image display when the
clearing character mode is set to the custom mode.

Figure 4.57

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 D.F. ON Display information of the D.F. counter.
OFF Not display information of the D.F. counter.
2 CVP ON Display information of the CVP counter.
OFF Not display information of the CVP counter.
3 Memory ON Display information of the portable memory counter.
OFF Not display information of the portable memory counter.

Table 4.28

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 127


4.8 User settings (OSD customization)

 “Custom disp 3” tab

The image quality information is set whether to be displayed or not on the endoscopic image display
when the clearing character mode is set to the custom mode.

4
3

Figure 4.58

Ch.4 No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 Enhance level ON Display the image enhancement level.
OFF Not display the image enhancement level.
2 Color mode ON Display the information of the color mode.
OFF Not display the information of the color mode.
3 Ob. mode ON Display the information of the observation mode.
OFF Not display the information of the observation mode.
Note:
The information of the observation mode is not displayed in the WLI observation
mode (See Figure 4.59).
4 Orientation ON Display the orientation mark.
OFF Not display the orientation mark.

Table 4.29

NBI: NBI observation


PDD1: PDD1 observation
PDD2: PDD2 observation

Figure 4.59

128 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.9 User settings (Color tone)

4.9 User settings (Color tone)

The color tone setting is set as described in Section 4.5, “Basic operation of the user settings”.

NOTE
• The color tone of the WLI, NBI, and PDD observations can be adjusted.
• The color tone of the selected observation mode can be adjusted. When adjusting
color tone of another observation mode, close the menu screen, change the
observation mode, and open this setup screen again.

Ch.4

Figure 4.60

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


1 R –8 to +8 (in a step) Set the red tone from –8 to +8.
2 B –8 to +8 (in a step) Set the blue tone from –8 to +8.
3 C –8 to +8 (in a step) Set the chroma from –8 to +8.

Table 4.30

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 129


4.10 Security settings for administrators

4.10 Security settings for administrators

The security settings are set in this section.


When changing the setting items which are set security settings,logging in is needed.

NOTE
For details on logging in, refer to Section 7.2, “Logging in”.

 Basic operation of the security settings

1 Press the “Menu” key on the keyboard or front panel (see Figure 4.61): the menu list
is displayed on the monitor (see Figure 4.62).

“Enter” key “Menu” key

Ch.4

Arrow keys

Figure 4.61

130 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.10 Security settings for administrators

2 Select the “Advanced menu” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key.

Advanced menu

Figure 4.62

3 Select the “Administrator menu” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key.

Administrator menu
Ch.4

Figure 4.63

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 131


4.10 Security settings for administrators

4 Select the “Security settings” with the arrow keys (see Figure 4.64) and press the
“Enter” key: the “Security settings” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.65).

Security settings

Figure 4.64

5 Select a desired setting item to be changed with the arrow keys and press the “Enter”
key: the setting value selection or direct entry become available.
Ch.4 For each setting item and its details, see from “ “Account” tab” on page 134 to
“ “Admin” tab” on page 137.

Figure 4.65

6 Select or directly enter the setting value to change.

NOTE
Setting items may be categorized by tabs. Select any tab with the arrow keys on
the keyboard to display the items to be set as necessary.

7 Select the “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: a confirmation
message box is displayed.

132 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.10 Security settings for administrators

8 Select the “Save” and press the “Enter” key: the security settings are edited, and the
endoscopic image screen is displayed.

NOTE
• When selecting the “Delete” and pressing the “Enter” key, the data is deleted and
the endoscopic image screen is displayed.
• When the error message is displayed, confirm that the entered data is correct.
• When no setting change is performed, a confirmation message box is not
displayed.

Ch.4

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 133


4.10 Security settings for administrators

 “Account” tab

The security function is set whether to be activated or not.

Figure 4.66

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Account None Disable the security function.
Admin Only the administrator function is secured.
User/admin The administrator and user functions are secured.

Table 4.31

134 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.10 Security settings for administrators

 “User” tab

The “Logging off timing”, “Individual ID”, and “General password” are set.

Figure 4.67

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Log-off timing OTV power-off Automatically log off when the video system center is turned
OFF.
Examination end Automatically log off at the examination end.
Menu scrn shut Automatically log off when exiting from a secured menu
screen.
2 Individual ID Enable Enable the security ID authentication.
Disable Disable the security ID authentication.
3 General password Direct entry by Enter the general password for general users.
keyboard
4 Confirm general Direct entry by Enter the general password again.
password keyboard
5 Initialize general Enter Initialize the password.
password

Table 4.32

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 135


4.10 Security settings for administrators

 “Target menu” tab

Each setting item is set whether to be secured or not.

1
2

4
5

Figure 4.68

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Patient menu Protect The “Patient menu” is secured.
Open The “Patient menu” is not secured.
2 View image Protect The “View image” is secured.
Open The “View image is not secured.
3 User setting/color tone Protect The “User settings/color tone” is secured.
Open The “User settings/color tone” is not secured.
4 System setup Protect The “System setup” is secured.
Open The “System setup” is not secured.
5 Scope information Protect The “Scope information” is secured.
Open The “Scope information” is not secured.

Table 4.33

136 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.10 Security settings for administrators

 “Admin” tab

The password of the administrator is set.

Figure 4.69

No. Setting item Setting value Explanation


Ch.4
1 Log-off time OTV Power OFF Automatically log off when the video system center is turned OFF.
Menu scrn shut Automatically log off when exiting from a secured menu screen.
2 Admin password Direct entry by Enter the password of the administrator.
keyboard
3 Confirm admin Direct entry by Enter the password of the administrator again.
password keyboard

Table 4.34

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 137


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

The user ID and password are set in this section.


Up to 5 user IDs can be set, and only the administrator can set the user ID when logging in by the
administrator password.

NOTE
For details on logging in, refer to Section 7.2, “Logging in”.

 Displaying the user ID

1 Press the “Menu” key on the keyboard or front panel: the menu list is displayed on the
monitor (see Figure 4.71).

“Enter” key “Menu” key


Ch.4

Arrow keys

Figure 4.70

138 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

2 Select the “Advanced menu” with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel and
press the “Enter” key.

Advanced menu

Figure 4.71

3 Select the “Administrator menu” with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel
and press the “Enter” key.
Ch.4
Administrator menu

Figure 4.72

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 139


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

4 Select the “Secure user registration” with the arrow key on the keyboard (see
Figure 4.73) and press the “Enter” key: the “Select user ID” screen is displayed (see
Figure 4.74).

Secure user registration

Figure 4.73

5 Select any operation in Table 4.35 and press the “Enter” key.
Ch.4 Follow instructions for selected operation.

Figure 4.74

Button Explanation
End (Menu) Return to the endoscopic image display.
Back (Esc) Return to the “Administrator menu” screen.
Input (I) Input and edit the user ID.
See “ Editing and new registering the user ID” on page 142.
Save (S) Save all user IDs to the portable memory.
See “ Saving the user ID to the portable memory” on page 145.
Load (L) Load all user IDs in the portable memory.
See “ Loading the user ID from the portable memory” on page 146.

140 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

Button Explanation
Delete (Del) Delete the registered user ID.
See “ Deleting the user ID” on page 144.
Table 4.35

Ch.4

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 141


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

 Editing and new registering the user ID

The user ID is edited or registered newly in this section.

1 Display the “Select user ID” screen as described in “ Displaying the user ID” on
page 138. (See Figure 4.75)
2 Select the “Input (I)” with the arrow keys, select the user ID to be edited from the user
ID list (see Figure 4.75), and press the “Enter” key. Then press the “Enter” key on the
keyboard: the “Select security ID > Input” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.76).

User ID list

Ch.4 Input (I)

Figure 4.75

3 Select each text box with the arrow keys and edit the user ID.

End (Menu) Next

Figure 4.76

142 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

Setting item Entering description Enter limit


ID ID Up to 15 half-width characters can be entered.
New password User password Up to 20 half-width characters can be entered.
Confirm password The same password as the user Up to 20 half-width characters can be entered.
password
Name Name Up to 20 half-width characters can be entered.

Table 4.36

4 Select “End (Menu)” when finishing editing the security ID (see Figure 4.76):
a confirmation message box is displayed.
5 Select the “Save” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the entered user ID is
saved.

NOTE
• The password can be registered only when the password in the “New password”
box corresponds with the one in the “Confirm password” box.
• Selecting the “End (Menu)” and pressing the “Enter” key on the keyboard return to Ch.4
the endoscopic image display.
• Selecting the “Back (Esc)” and pressing the “Enter” key on the keyboard return to
the “Select user ID” screen.
• Select the “Next” if registering continuously.
• The same user ID as the one that has been registered cannot be registered.
• The user ID cannot be registered unless it is entered.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 143


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

 Deleting the user ID

1 Display the “Select user ID” screen as described in “ Displaying the user ID” on
page 138. (See Figure 4.77)
2 Select the “Delete (Del)” and the user ID to be deleted with the arrow keys and press
the “Enter” key on the keyboard: a confirmation message box is displayed.

User ID list

Delete (Del)

Ch.4

Figure 4.77

3 When a confirmation message box is displayed, select “Yes” on the message box and
press the “Enter” key. the selected user ID is deleted.

NOTE
Selecting the “No” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key cancel the
deletion.

4 When deleting other information, repeat Step 2 and 3.


5 Select the “End (Menu)” and press the “Enter” key: the endoscopic image screen is
displayed.

144 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

 Saving the user ID to the portable memory

Every user ID is saved to the portable memory. The user ID can be transferred to another OTV-S190
using the portable memory that the user ID is saved in.

NOTE
Confirm that there are no necessary security IDs in the portable memory. It is
overwritten with the user ID transferred from the video system center, and it cannot
be restored.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port. For inserting the portable
memory, see “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on
page 225.
2 Display the “Select user ID” screen as described in “ Displaying the user ID” on
page 138. (See Figure 4.78)
3 Select the “Save (S)” and desired user ID and press the “Enter” key: a confirmation
message box is displayed.
Ch.4
User ID list

Save (S)

Figure 4.78

4 Select the “Yes” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: every user ID is saved
to the portable memory.

NOTE
Selecting the “No” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key cancel saving
the user ID to the portable memory.

5 Select the “End (Menu)” and press the “Enter” key: the endoscopic image is
displayed.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 145


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

NOTE
Selecting the “Back (Esc)” and pressing the “Enter” key return to the endoscopic
image screen.

 Loading the user ID from the portable memory

The user ID saved in the portable memory is load to the video system center.

NOTE
Confirm that there are no necessary security IDs in the portable memory in the
“Select security ID” screen. It is overwritten with the user ID transferred from the
video system center, and it cannot be restored.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port. For inserting the portable
memory, see “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on
Ch.4
page 225.
2 Display the “Select user ID” screen as described in “ Displaying the user ID” on
page 138. (See Figure 4.79)
3 Select the “Load (L)” with the arrow keys: a confirmation message box is displayed.

Load (L)

Figure 4.79

4 Select the “Yes” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the user IDs are
loaded to the portable memory.

146 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.11 Secure user registration for administrators

NOTE
Selecting the “No” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key: the data is not
loaded to the portable memory.

5 Select the “End (Menu)” and press the “Enter” key: the endoscopic image screen is
displayed.

NOTE
Selecting the “Back (Esc)” with the arrow keys and pressing the “Enter” key return
to the previous screen.

Ch.4

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 147


4.12 Password

4.12 Password

The ID-authenticated user password is changed in this section.


The password can be changed only when logging in by the individual password. The password cannot
be changed by the following procedures when logging in by the common password, administrator
password, or service password.

1 Press the “Menu” key on the keyboard or front panel: the menu list is displayed on the
monitor (see Figure 4.81).

“Enter” key “Menu” key

Ch.4 

Arrow keys

Figure 4.80

2 Select the “Advanced menu” with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel and
press the “Enter” key.

Advanced menu

Figure 4.81

148 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


4.12 Password

3 Select the “Security” with the arrow keys on the keyboard (see Figure 4.82) and press
the “Enter” key: the “Password settings” screen is displayed (see Figure 4.83).

Security

Figure 4.82

4 Enter the new password to be set in the “New password” box.

New password box


Ch.4

Figure 4.83

5 Enter the same password as the one entered in the “New password” box in the
“Confirm password” box (see Figure 4.83) and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard:
a confirmation message box is displayed.
6 Select the “Save” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the password is
changed, and the endoscopic image screen is displayed.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 149


4.12 Password

NOTE
• The current password to be changed is displayed with “”.
• The password can be changed only when the password in the “New password” box
corresponds with the one in the “Confirm password” box.
• Up to 20 half-width characters can be entered for the password.
• Selecting the “End (Menu)” and pressing the “Enter” key on the keyboard return to
the endoscopic image display.
• Selecting the “No” on the confirmation message box and pressing the “Enter” key
on the keyboard do not change the password and return to the endoscopic image
display.

Ch.4

150 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


5.1 Precautions of inspection

Chapter 5 Inspection
Prepare the video system center and other ancillary equipment before each particular case. Refer to
the respective instruction manuals for each piece of equipment.

5.1 Precautions of inspection

WARNING
• Review Chapter 3, “Installation and Connection” thoroughly, and prepare the
instruments properly before inspection. If the equipment is not properly prepared
before each use, equipment damage, patient and operator injury can occur.
• Before each case, inspect the video system center as instructed below. Inspect
other equipment to be used with this video system center as instructed in their
respective instruction manuals. Should the slightest irregularity be suspected, do
not use the video system center and see Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting”. If the
irregularity is still suspected after consulting Chapter 9, contact Olympus. Damage
or irregularity may result in equipment damage, an electric shock, and/or burns.
Ch.5

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 151


5.2 Inspection work flow

5.2 Inspection work flow

Please see the inspection work flow below. Follow each step of the work flow for inspection of the
video system center before use.

Confirm that the video system center turns ON normally.


1 Section 5.3 on page 153

Confirm that examination light is emitted from the distal


2 end of the endoscope.
Section 5.4 on page 154

Confirm that the endoscopic image is displayed properly.


3 Section 5.5 on page 154

Confirm the automatic brightness control function.


Ch.5 4 Section 5.6 on page 155

Confirm the monitor display.


5 Section 5.7 on page 156

Inspect all necessary functions.


• Freeze functionSection 5.8 on page 157
• Release functionSection 5.9 on page 158
6 • PIP/POP functionSection 5.10 on page 159
• Orientation functionSection 5.11 on page 159
• Custom switches functionSection 5.12 on page 159
• Optical-digital observation functionSection 5.13 on page 159

Confirm that the video system center turns OFF normally.


7 Section 5.14 on page 163

152 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


5.3 Inspection of the power supply

5.3 Inspection of the power supply

1 Confirm that the ventilation grills on the right side and left side panels of the video
system center are not covered with dust or other materials.
2 Connect an endoscope.

NOTE
For the connection of the endoscope, refer to Section 6.3, “Connection of an
endoscope”.

3 Press the power switch of the video system center. The power indicator lights up.

Power indicator

Ch.5

Power switch

Figure 5.1

4 Confirm that air is exhausted by holding your hand in rear of the ventilation grills on
the left side panel.

WARNING
If the exhaustion is not confirmed, do not use the video system center and contact
Olympus.

 If the power fails to come ON


When the power fails to come ON, turn the video system center OFF. Then check the video
system center referring to Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting”. If the power still fails to come ON,
contact Olympus.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 153


5.4 Inspection of the examination light

5.4 Inspection of the examination light

WARNING
Do not stare directly into the light beam. This may result in eye injury.

Turn ON the light source and confirm that


examination light is emitted from the distal end
of the endoscope. For operation of the light Endoscope’s
source, refer to its instruction manual. distal end

Examination
light

Figure 5.2

Ch.5
5.5 Video monitor display inspection

Operate the video monitor according to the instructions given in the video monitor’s
instruction manual and confirm that the endoscopic image is displayed properly.

154 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


5.6 Inspection of the automatic brightness adjustment function

5.6 Inspection of the automatic brightness


adjustment function

1 Confirm that the “AUTO” indicator of the auto/manual indicators lights up and that the
brightness level indicator on the front panel lights up on “0” by referring to the
instruction manual for the light source.
2 Move the distal end of the endoscope between
5 and 60 mm from your palm. Confirm that the
brightness of the image on the monitor remains
constant and that the light emitted from the
distal end of the endoscope changes in your
palm.

Figure 5.3

3 Hold the distal end of the endoscope 3 cm from your palm. Use a piece of gauze, etc.
to prevent the endoscope’s distal end and your palm from being exposed to Ch.5
extraneous light. View the image on the monitor.
4 Confirm that the brightness of the image on the monitor changes when the light
source’s brightness level is changed.

NOTE
• In combination with some endoscope models, the space between the distal end of
the endoscope and your palm in which the automatic brightness adjustment
function is available will be smaller than 5 – 60 mm. Please refer to the instruction
manual for the endoscope used.
• The exposure level indicator on the video system center goes off depending on the
light source connected. Refer to “ Brightness” on page 191 for instructions on
controlling the brightness.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 155


5.7 Inspection of the monitor display

5.7 Inspection of the monitor display

CAUTION
Be sure to perform white balance adjustment before inspecting the color on the
monitor display. See Section 6.5, “White balance adjustment”.

1 Confirm that the endoscopic image is displayed on the monitor. Display the characters
on the monitor when they are cleared.

Date

Time

CVP counter

DF counter

Memory counter

Ch.5

Figure 5.4

2 Confirm that the date and time are correct. (See Figure 5.4)
3 Confirm that the “Memory” counter, “CVP” counter, “DF” counter, are displayed on the
screen when the portable memory, video printer, or digital filing system is connected
to the video system center.
4 Confirm that the endoscopic image is displayed
with the correct colors and without noise by
observing the palm of your hand.

Figure 5.5

5 Confirm that enough space is available on the portable memory or internal buffer of
the video system center to store endoscopic images.

156 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


5.8 Inspection of the freeze function

NOTE
• The display layout is variable according to the connected endoscope and user
setting.
• For setting the date or time, refer to “ “Date/comment” tab” on page 80.

5.8 Inspection of the freeze function

The “FREEZE” function is needed to be assigned to the remote switch or foot switch in advance. For
details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

WARNING
Do not use this instrument when the live image cannot be observed. Otherwise,
patient injury may occur.

1 Press the “FREEZE” key on the keyboard or


“FREEZE” key
the custom switch to which the “FREEZE”
function is assigned. Ch.5

Figure 5.6

2 Confirm that the live endoscopic image freezes and a short beep is heard.
3 Press the “FREEZE” key or the custom switch to which the “FREEZE” function is
assigned again.
4 Confirm that the frozen image returns to the live image.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 157


5.9 Inspection of the release function

5.9 Inspection of the release function

The “RELEASE” function is needed to be assigned to the remote switch or foot switch in advance. For
details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

1 Press the “RELEASE” key on the keyboard or


“RELEASE” key
the custom switch to which the “RELEASE”
function is assigned.

Figure 5.7

2 Confirm that a beep is heard, and the live endoscopic image freezes for a short time.
Then the image returns to the live image.
3 Confirm that the selected recording device is activated.
Ch.5
4 Confirm that the counter for the recording devices displayed on the monitor
increments by one.

NOTE
• For selecting the recording device, refer to “Recording the frozen image
(releasing)” on page 222.
• When selecting the “REMOTE” function, the error message is not displayed in the
screen even if the recording device is not connected to the remote terminal, or the
connected device is turned OFF.

158 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


5.10 Inspection of the PIP/POP function

5.10 Inspection of the PIP/POP function

According to “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on page 257, confirm
that the PIP or POP indication can be performed correctly.

5.11 Inspection of the orientation function

If the orientation function is activated, confirm that the indication on the monitor is an
endoscopic image rotated by 180 (refer to “ “Observation 1” tab” on page 114).

5.12 Inspection of the remote switches

If any function is assigned to the scope’s remote switches and/or foot switches, Ch.5
confirm the proper function of these switches.

5.13 Inspection of the optical-digital observation


function

When the light source (CLV-S190, CLV-180, CLV-S40Pro) is connected to this instrument, confirm the
optical-digital observation as follows.
The dedicated endoscopes are required for NBI observation, and PDD observation. Inspect the
available optical-digital observation as follows.
The “OBSERVATION MODE”, “NBI”, or “PDD” function is needed to be assigned to the remote switch
or foot switch in advance. For details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 159


5.13 Inspection of the optical-digital observation function

 Confirming the available observation mode

Confirm the available observation mode by checking the observation mode indicators on the front
panel of the light source.

 When the light source of CLV-S190 is used


The observation mode indicators light up to indicate the available observation modes.

Observation mode indicators


The available observation modes light up.

Figure 5.8
Ch.5
 When the light source of CLV-180 is used
The observation mode indicators light up green to show the available observation modes.

Observation mode
The available observation modes light up.

Figure 5.9

160 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


5.13 Inspection of the optical-digital observation function

 When the light source of CLV-S40Pro is used


The observation mode indicators light up green to show the available observation modes.

Observation mode indicators


The available observation modes light up.

Figure 5.10

 Inspection of NBI observation

1 Press the “NBI” key on the keyboard, or custom switch to which the “OBSERVATION
MODE” or “NBI” is assigned. Ch.5
2 Confirm that the observation mode indicator shows “NBI”.

Observation mode
indicator

Figure 5.11

NOTE
When returning the NBI observation mode to the normal light observation mode,
press the “WLI” key on the keyboard.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 161


5.13 Inspection of the optical-digital observation function

 Inspection of PDD observation

1 Press the “PDD” key on the keyboard, or custom switch assigned the
“OBSERVATION MODE” or “PDD”.
2 Confirm that the observation mode indicator shows “PDD”.

Observation mode
indicator

Figure 5.12

Ch.5

162 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


5.14 Inspection of power OFF

5.14 Inspection of power OFF

1 Press the power switch of the video system center.


2 Confirm that the video system center is turned OFF.

WARNING
If the power indicator remains lit after this instrument has been turned OFF, do not
use this instrument, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and contact
Olympus.

CAUTION
If removing the portable memory or turning the equipment OFF while the access
indicator or the LED of the portable memory is blinking, press the access stop
button so that the blinking finishes. The memory and/or data may be damaged or
the data may be erased.

NOTE
The power indicator goes OFF about 3 seconds after the power switch is pressed.
Ch.5

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 163


5.14 Inspection of power OFF

Ch.5

164 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.1 Precautions of operation

Chapter 6 Operation
This chapter explains the work flow of endoscopic observation using the video system center. For
information on how to use the functions that are not explained in this chapter, refer to the Chapter 7,
“Function”.
The operator of the video system center must be a physician or medical personnel under the
supervision of a physician and must have received sufficient training in clinical endoscopic techniques.
This manual, therefore, does not explain or discuss clinical endoscopic procedures. It only describes
basic operation and precautions related to the operation of the video system center.

6.1 Precautions of operation

WARNING
• Be sure to wear protective equipment such as eye wear, face mask,
moisture-resistant clothing, and chemical-resistant gloves that fit properly and are
long enough so that your skin is not exposed. Otherwise, dangerous chemicals
and/or potentially infectious material such as blood and/or mucus of the patient
may cause an infection.
• Should any irregularity be observed, do not use the video system center. Damage
or irregularity may result in equipment damage, an electric shock, and/or burns. Ch.6
• Anytime you observe an irregularity in a video system center function, stop the
examination immediately and take action according to the following instructions.
Using a defective video system center may cause patient and/or operator injury.
 If the endoscopic image disappears or if the image freezes and cannot be
restored, temporarily turn the video system center OFF and wait for about
10 seconds. Then turn it back ON again.
For ancillary equipment used in conjunction with the video system center, also
turn the power OFF and then ON again as directed in their respective instruction
manuals. If this fails to correct the problem, immediately stop using the
equipment and turn the video system center and light source OFF. Then, gently
withdraw the endoscope from the patient as described in the endoscope’s
instruction manual.
 If any other abnormality occurs or is suspected, immediately stop using the
equipment, turn OFF all equipment, and gently withdraw the endoscope from
the patient as described in the endoscope’s instruction manual.
After withdrawing the endoscope, take action according to the instructions in
Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting”. If the problems cannot be resolved by the remedial
action, contact Olympus.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 165


6.1 Precautions of operation

WARNING
• Combination with other equipment
 Do not use the video system center in locations exposed to direct strong
electromagnetic radiations (for example, microwave treatment device, short
wave treatment device, MRI, radio equipment, or cellular phones).
Electromagnetic radiation can interfere with the monitor display.
 Use only Olympus high-frequency electrosurgical equipment with this unit.
Non-Olympus equipment can cause interference on the monitor display or a
loss of the endoscopic image.
 Before using high-frequency electrosurgical equipment, be sure to install and
connect the equipment according to its instruction manual and make sure that
the noise does not affect the observation and surgical procedures. If
high-frequency electrosurgical equipment is used without such confirmation,
patient injury may result.
• To activate the auto brightness adjustment function of the light source, the video
system center should be turned ON. If it is not turned ON, the auto brightness
adjustment function is not activated and the light intensity is set to maximum. In this
case, the endoscope distal end would become hot and could cause burns to the
operator and physician (if a light source model other than CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro
or CLV-180 is used).
• Operate the endoscope or perform endoscopic treatment while observing the
endoscopic live image. If operating the endoscope or performing endoscopic
treatment while freezing or playing back the endoscopic image, patient injury may
Ch.6 occur.
• When using spray-type medical agents such as lubricant, anesthetic, or alcohol,
use them away from the video system center so that the medical agents do not
contact the video system center. Sprayed medical agents might enter the video
system center through the ventilation grills and may cause fire and/or equipment
damage.
• Do not use a humidifier near the video system center as condensation may occur
and cause equipment failure.

NOTE
• High-frequency electrosurgical equipment can cause slight interference and
disorder of color tone on the monitor display.
• Sometimes horizontal line noise appears when a slim endoscope is used. To
reduce the horizontal line noise, select “Edge enhancement” for the enhancement
setting.

166 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.2 Operation flow

6.2 Operation flow

Please see the operation work flow in below. Follow each step of the work flow for using the video
system center.

Inspect the instruments before use.


1 Chapter 5 on page 151

Connect the endoscope to the video system center and the


2 light source.
Section 6.3 on page 169

Turn the video system center ON.


3 Section 6.4 on page 174

Adjust the white balance.


4 Section 6.5 on page 175

Select a user name. Ch.6


5 Section 6.6 on page 178

Enter the patient data.


6 Section 6.7 on page 181

Perform the examination.


7 Section 6.8 on page 185
Chapter 7 on page 187

Terminate the examination.


8 Section 6.9 on page 186

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 167


6.2 Operation flow

Disconnect the endoscope from the video system center


9 and the light source.
Section 6.9 on page 186

Care and store the instrument and ancillary equipment


10 appropriately after use.
Chapter 8 on page 285

Ch.6

168 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.3 Connection of an endoscope

6.3 Connection of an endoscope

Connect the endoscope to the video system center and the light source.

CAUTION
• Make sure that the video connector and its electrical contacts are completely dry
before connecting the plug to the video system center. When the video connector
and its electrical contacts wet, wipe them as described in the instruction manual for
the endoscope. Wet equipment could cause the image to flicker or disappear.

“UP” mark

Video connector
Electrical contacts

Figure 6.1

• Connect the video connector all the way into the socket. The improper connection
may increase image noise or may cause disappearance of the endoscopic image
during operation.
Ch.6
• Do not touch the video connector of the endoscope or any of the electrical contacts
inside the video connector socket of this instrument. Otherwise, this instrument
may malfunction.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the endoscope and camera head, be sure to
turn OFF the video system center. Otherwise, the CCD may be destroyed, and the
image may not be displayed.
• Do not apply excessive force to the camera head by bending, stretching or
crushing it. Also do not pull a bundle of camera cables, as this may cause internal
wire disconnection.
• Be sure to refer to the instruction manuals of the ancillary equipment including the
endoscope and camera head.

NOTE
• The color bar is displayed when the endoscope or camera head is not connected
securely.
• For connecting the endoscope or camera head, refer to their respective manuals as
well.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 169


6.3 Connection of an endoscope

 VISERA series videoscope

This instrument

Video connector socket Light source

Output socket

Light guide connector


VISERA series videoscope

Figure 6.2

1 Ensure that this instrument and all connected devices are turned OFF.
2 Confirm that the electrical contacts inside the video connector socket of this
instrument are not damaged.
Ch.6
3 Confirm that the video connector of the videoscope are not damaged.
4 Connect the light guide connector of the videoscope to the light source (see
Figure 6.2), referring to the instruction manual for the light source.
5 Push the video connector into the video
Video connector socket
connector socket of the instrument all the way
until it clicks, holding this instrument with a
hand so that it will not move. Confirm that the
“UP” mark
“UP” mark points upwards.

Video connector

Figure 6.3

170 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.3 Connection of an endoscope

 Fiberscope and camera head

Use the camera head to connect a fiberscope to this instrument.

This instrument
Video connector Output socket Light source
socket

Fiberscope

Video adapters, camera


heads, etc.

Figure 6.4

1 Ensure that this instrument and all connected devices are turned OFF.
2 Confirm that the electrical contacts inside the video connector socket of this
instrument are not damaged.
Ch.6
3 Confirm that the video connectors of the camera head are not damaged.
4 Connect the endoscope connector of the fiberscope to the light source (see
Figure 6.4), referring to the instruction manual for the light source.
5 Push the video connector of the camera head
Video connector socket
into the video connector socket of the
instrument all the way until it clicks, holding this
instrument with a hand so that it will not move.
“UP” mark
Confirm that the “UP” mark points upwards.

Video connector

Figure 6.5

6 Connect the video adapter and camera head to the eyepiece section of the fiberscope
(see Figure 6.4), referring to the instruction manuals for the video adapter and camera
head.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 171


6.3 Connection of an endoscope

NOTE
Connect the video adapter to the camera head that requires the adapter. For
details, refer to the instruction manual for the camera head.

 Rigidscope and camera head

This instrument

Video connector
socket Output socket Light source

Light guide cable

Video adapters, camera


heads, etc.
Rigidscope

Figure 6.6
Ch.6

1 Ensure that this instrument and all connected devices are turned OFF.
2 Confirm that the electrical contacts inside the video connector socket of this
instrument are not damaged.
3 Confirm that the video connector of the camera head are not damaged.
4 Connect the light guide cable to the light source (see Figure 6.6), referring to the
instruction manual for the light source.

172 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.3 Connection of an endoscope

5 Push the video connector of the camera head


Video connector socket
into the video connector socket of the
instrument all the way until it clicks, holding this
instrument with a hand so that it will not move.
“UP” mark
Confirm that the “UP” mark points upwards.

Video connector

Figure 6.7

6 Attach the light guide cable and camera head to the rigidscope (see Figure 6.6),
referring to the instruction manuals for the light guide cable and camera head.

NOTE
• When the light source is connected to the video system center, either of them can
be turned ON first.
• Connect the video adapter to the camera head that requires the adapter. For
details, refer to the instruction manual for the camera head.

Ch.6

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 173


6.4 Turning the video system center ON

6.4 Turning the video system center ON

1 Turn the ancillary equipment ON.


2 Turn the instrument ON by pressing the power switch. The power indicator lights up.
The endoscopic image appears on the monitor.

Power indicator

Power switch
Endoscopic image

Figure 6.8

NOTE
For the procedure of turning the ancillary equipment ON, refer to each instrument’s
Ch.6 instruction manual.

174 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.5 White balance adjustment

6.5 White balance adjustment

The white balance adjustment is used to display the correct image color on the monitor. Be sure to
always adjust the white balance in the following cases:
• Before observation
• After exchange of the light source
• When any abnormally can be seen on the color of the image even if white balance adjustment
has been completed.

WARNING
• When adjusting the white balance of the endoscope to be used in the sterilized
zone, do not use the white cap (MH-155) as described in this part, but use a white
object such as a piece of gauze without bringing it in contact with the endoscope.
Contact of the endoscope with a nonsterilized object may result in
cross-contamination.
• Make sure that the endoscope and white cap (MH-155, option) are clean before
adjusting the white balance. Otherwise, cross-contamination may result.
• Always control the color tone and/or enhancement of the image appropriately
before observation. Setting an inappropriate color tone or enhancement condition
may result in overlooking or wrong diagnosis.

CAUTION
Ch.6

• When using the endoscope having the endoscope information function, do not turn
the video system center OFF or disconnect the endoscope until the white balance
adjustment is complete. Otherwise, the data stored on the memory chip of the
endoscope may be destroyed. Confirm that the endoscope has the memory chip by
referring to the instruction manual for the endoscope.
• Do not allow extraneous light to enter the white cap during white balance
adjustment. Otherwise, correct adjustment will be impossible.
• Adjust the white balance with the distal end of the endoscope inserted into the
white cap when using the instrument in the nonsterilized zone.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 175


6.5 White balance adjustment

NOTE
• Even after completion of the white balance adjustment, perform the adjustment
again whenever the colors in the endoscopic image look abnormal.
• The white balance adjustment is not available in the NBI and PDD observation. Be
sure to return to the ordinary observation mode before proceeding the white
balance adjustment.
• Always control the color tone and/or enhancement of the image appropriately
before observation. Setting an inappropriate color tone or enhancement condition
may result in overlooking or wrong diagnosis.
• An endoscope with the memory chip can save the data of the white balance
adjustment in the memory chip of the endoscope. When the data of the white
balance adjustment is saved, data is loaded automatically at the moment this
instrument is turned ON.

1 Confirm that the light source is ON and turn ON the examination lamp of the light
source.
2 Confirm that the complete indicator on the front panel of the video system center is lit.
If the complete indicator is lit, the white balance adjustment is completed. If complete
indicator is not lit, the operations of the following steps are necessary.

Complete indicator

Ch.6

White balance button

Figure 6.9

3 Confirm that the observation mode is not displayed in the upper right of the screen
and that this instrument is in the normal light observation mode.

4 Set the brightness level of the light source to the center of the adjustment range.
5 When adjusting the white balance of the endoscope to be used in the sterilized zone,
use a white object such as a piece of gauze without bringing it in contact with the
endoscope. Confirm that the white object is displayed on the full-screen and avoid
wash-out of the monitor image.

176 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.5 White balance adjustment

6 When adjusting the white balance of the


endoscope in the nonsterilized zone, insert the
White cap
endoscope’s distal end into the white cap and
hold the white cap (MH-155) and endoscope
stable to avoid wash-out of the monitor image.

Figure 6.10

7 Hold the endoscope stable to avoid wash-out of the monitor image. Enlarge the image
to full-screen while monitoring a white object, such as a piece of gauze, in such a way
that it does not contact the endoscope.
Press the white balance button until a short beep is generated. When the white
balance adjustment is completed, the complete indicator on front panel light up.
8 The white balance adjustment is completed when the adjustment results are
successful. If the adjustment failed, go back to Step 3.

NOTE
• The white balance adjustment can be performed automatically and simultaneously
for all observation modes that the connected endoscope is able to perform. When
the connected endoscope is compatible with all three modes, the adjustment takes
6-8 seconds. Ch.6
• The result of the adjustment is displayed for about two seconds.
• When the white balance adjustment cannot be completed, check if the color tone
and/or brightness are correct and the white cap or gauze is clean.
• Once the white balance adjustment is completed, the “COMPLETE” indicator stay
lit until the video system center is turned OFF.
• The white balance adjustment can also be initiated from the scope switches and/or
foot switches. See Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)” for directions on
how to set up the scope switches and foot switches.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 177


6.6 Recall of user settings data

6.6 Recall of user settings data

The operating conditions for each user (operator) can be recalled from the “User settings” menu. See
Section 4.5, “Basic operation of the user settings”.

CAUTION
Confirm that the required user settings data is selected before starting the
observation. If different user settings data is used, unintended operations may
occur.

NOTE
The user settings data used in the last operation before turning the video system
center OFF comes up after turning the instrument ON.

1 Press the “Menu” key on the keyboard or front


“Enter” key “Menu” key
panel: the menu list is displayed on the monitor
(see Figure 6.12).

Ch.6

Arrow key

Figure 6.11

178 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.6 Recall of user settings data

2 Select the “User settings” with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel and
press the “Enter” key.

User settings

Figure 6.12

3 Select the “Select(s)” with the arrow keys on the keyboard and press the “Enter” key.

Ch.6

Figure 6.13

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 179


6.6 Recall of user settings data

4 Select the desired user settings data and press the “ENTER” key. Then the user
settings data is loaded to the video system center, and the “Endoscope’s instrument
channel information”, “Endoscope information”, and “Remote switch assignment”
appear on the monitor for about 5 seconds.

Endoscopic image

Endoscope’s instrument
channel information

Endoscope information

Custom switch assignment

Figure 6.14

5 Confirm that the selected user name is displayed on the upper part of the “Custom
switch assignment”. (See Figure 6.14)

NOTE
Pressing the “MENU” button of the front panel twice displays the scope switch
assignment information.
Ch.6

180 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.7 Patient data

6.7 Patient data

Before the observation, enter the patient data into the endoscopic image. There are two methods to
enter the patient data:
• Patient data can be entered immediately before the examination.
• A list of several patient data can be entered in advance.
This section explains how to enter patient data immediately before the examination. To enter a list of
several patient data in advance, see Section 7.15, “Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient
data”.

CAUTION
• Before entering patient data, press the “EXAM END” key to clear the previous
patient data. Otherwise, different patient data can be mixed on one print sheet
and/or normal functioning of the digital filing system cannot be guaranteed.
• Confirm that the name on the monitor is identical to the name of the patient to be
observed before the examination.
• When recording the images, be sure to record the images together with the patient
data. Distinction between different observations may become difficult.
• Be sure to enter the patient ID when entering patient data. Also be sure to enter a
different patient ID for each patient. Otherwise, the image data for some patients
may mix in the same image folder.
Ch.6

NOTE
The patient data entered in the endoscopic image is not registered in the video
system center as “Patient Data/Entry Data” menu.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 181


6.7 Patient data

 Entering patient data

1 When operating by the keyboard, press the “EXAM” key on the keyboard to delete the
previous patient data. Go to Step 4.
2 When operating by “Function Operation Panel”,
select the “Function Operation Panel” to display
the “Function Operation Panel” as described in
Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list”.


Figure 6.15

3 Press the “EXAM” key to delete “Function Operation Panel”.

Ch.6

Figure 6.16

182 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.7 Patient data

4 Enter data using the keyboard or software keyboard.

Shift Enter

Tab
Enter

Shift

Fn

Figure 6.17

Key Explanation
“ ”, “ ” Press to move the cursor up and down.
“Tab” Press to move the cursor to the next data field.
“Shift” + “Tab” Press to move the cursor to the previous data field.
“ ”, “ ” Press to move the cursor right and left.
Home (“Fn” + “ ”) Press to move the cursor to the left end of the data.
End (“Fn” + “ ”) Press to move the cursor to the right end of the data.
“Shift” + Home Press to move the cursor to the “ID No.”.
“Shift” + End Press to move the cursor to the “Comment” area. Ch.6
“Enter” Press to confirm the entered data and to move the cursor to the next data.

Table 6.1

Data Data input condition


ID No. Up to 15 characters
Name Up to 20 characters
Sex 1 character
Age Up to 3 characters.
Automatically calculated after entering D.O.B.
D.O.B 8 characters.
Enter the number according to the format (see on page 80).

Table 6.2

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 183


6.7 Patient data

NOTE
• Information can be saved even if only the necessary items are filled in.
• If the setting item “Retain date” in the “OSD” tab of the system settings is set to
“ON”, the patient data displayed in the endoscopic image display is saved after
turning OFF the video system center. When turning ON the video system center
again, the same patient data is recalled on the endoscope image display.

 Editing and deleting patient data

1 Move the cursor to the text box to be edited or deleted with the arrow keys or tab key
on the keyboard.
2 Edit or delete patient data using the software keyboard or the keyboard.

NOTE
When deleting all patient data displayed on the patient data list, pressing the
“EXAM” key on the keyboard also deletes data.

“EXAM” key

Ch.6

Figure 6.18

184 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


6.8 Observation and recording of the endoscopic image

6.8 Observation and recording of the endoscopic


image

 Observation of the endoscopic image


Observe the endoscopic image using the various functions provided with the video system
center. For details of the functions, see Chapter 7, “Function”.

WARNING
Always control the color tone and/or enhancement of the image appropriately
before observation.
Setting an inappropriate color tone or enhancement condition may result in
overlooking or wrong diagnosis.

 Recording of the endoscopic image


Table 6.3 shows the devices that can record and/or print endoscopic images. These devices can
be controlled by the keyboard, scope switches, etc. For the operation of these devices, see
Chapter 7.

Recording device Reference


Portable memory See Section 7.11, “Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable Ch.6
memory or internal buffer)” on page 223.
Video recorder See Section 7.12, “Remotely controlling the DVR” on page 251.
Video printer See Section 7.13, “Remotely controlling the video printer” on page 254.

Table 6.3

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 185


6.9 Termination of the operation

6.9 Termination of the operation

CAUTION
Before connecting or disconnecting the endoscope and camera head, be sure to
turn OFF the video system center. Otherwise, the CCD may be destroyed.

1 Press the “EXAM” key on the keyboard or select “Exam” on the “Function operation
panel”.
2 Confirm that the “Access indicator” on the front panel or LED of the portable memory
is not blinking.
3 Turn off the video system center and ancillary equipment.
4 When a VISERA series endoscope or camera head is used, disconnect the video
connector of the videoscope from the instrument, holding the instrument with a hand
so that it will not move and push the locking lever down.

Locking lever

Ch.6 Video connector

Figure 6.19

186 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.1 Basic operation of the menu list

Chapter 7 Function
This chapter explains the functions of the buttons and keys on the video system center. See the
“System setup” menu and “user settings” menu in Chapter 4, “Function setup” for presetting.

7.1 Basic operation of the menu list

1 Press the “Menu” key on the keyboard or front panel: the menu list is displayed on the
monitor.

Menu list
“Enter” key “Menu” key

Arrow key
Keyboard
Monitor

Figure 7.1 Ch.7

2 Select a desired setting menu from the menu list shown in the Table 7.1 with the
arrow keys on the front panel or the keyboard and press the “Enter” key (see
Figure 7.1): the desired setting menu is displayed on the monitor.

NOTE
When the menu list is a hierarchical menu, additionally select any menu after
selecting the desired menu. If the menu has a sub-menu, the “[+]” mark is indicated
before the menu.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 187


7.1 Basic operation of the menu list

First Second Third


Reference
hierarchy hierarchy hierarchy
Function See Section 7.17, “Operation without the keyboard” on
operation page 282.
panel
Patient See Section 7.15, “Presetting, calling, saving, and loading
– –
data*1 patient data” on page 262.
User See Section 4.5, “Basic operation of the user settings” on
settings page 90.
See Section 4.6, “User settings (basic setup)” on page 105.
– – See Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)” on page 117.
See Section 4.8, “User settings (OSD customization)” on
page 124.
See Section 4.9, “User settings (Color tone)” on page 129.
Image view See Section 7.11, “Recording and playing back the frozen
– –
image (portable memory or internal buffer)” on page 223.
[+] Color tone See “ Color tone level adjustment” on page 201.

Adjustment adjustment
menu Exposure/ See “ Brightness” on page 191.
Brightness – See “ Exposure” on page 193.
adjustment
[+] Setup System setup See Section 4.2, “Basic operation of the system setup” on
menu page 72.
– See Section 4.3, “System setup (system)” on page 79.
See Section 4.4, “System setup (connection setting)” on
page 88.
Scope See “ Confirming and editing data of the endoscope” on

information page 279.
Ch.7 [+] Monitor check Color bar See “ Displaying the color bar and the 50% white screen” on
screen 50% white page 277.
Password setup – Not used.
Hardware – See “ Displaying the hardware information” on page 214.
Portable memory See “ Formatting the portable memory” on page 227.

test
Portable memory See “ Formatting the portable memory” on page 227.

format
[+] Administrator Secure user See Section 4.11, “Secure user registration for administrators”
menu registration on page 138.
Security See Section 4.10, “Security settings for administrators” on
settings page 130.
System reset See “ System reset” on page 281.

*1 Either “Patient data” or “Order search/call” is displayed depending on a setting.

Table 7.1

188 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.2 Logging in

7.2 Logging in

When operating the menu to which security settings are set, logging in is needed. For security settings,
refer to “ Basic operation of the security settings” on page 130. The menu to which security settings
are set has a security mark on its right side.

1 Select “Login (L)” or a menu to which security Security mark


settings are set as described in Section 7.1,
“Basic operation of the menu list” to display the
“Login” window.

Login

Figure 7.2

2 Select each text box to input a log-in ID and its password.

Item Description
ID The individual ID, administrator ID, or user general ID is input.
Password The password valid for the ID is input.

Table 7.2
Ch.7
3 Select the “OK” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard. When the password is
valid, the security mark disappears, and the menu to which security settings are set
can be operable.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 189


7.3 Brightness adjustment

NOTE
• Both the log-in ID and password for the administrator ID are “admin”, and both the
common ID and password for the general user are “common”.
• The individual ID may be invalid according to settings.
• Log-off is executed with a timing that has been set.
• The menu for the administrator can be operated only when logging in by the
administrator ID.

7.3 Brightness adjustment

 Iris mode

This operation changes the iris mode of endoscopic image.


The iris mode needs to be set in advance as described in “ “Color/Bright.” tab” on page 112.
The iris mode changing function needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details, see
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the custom switch to which the iris mode changing function is assigned: the iris
mode is changed as it is set in the user setup, and the selected iris mode is displayed
for about 2 seconds on the monitor.
The iris modes are shown in Table 7.3.

Ch.7
Iris mode Explanation
Auto The brightness is adjusted based on the brightest part of the
central part and the average brightness of the periphery part.
Peak The brightness is adjusted based on the brightest part of the
endoscopic image.
Average The brightness is adjusted based on the average brightness of
the endoscopic image.

Table 7.3

NOTE
When changing the iris mode, two modes selected from three modes in the user
setup are available.

190 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.3 Brightness adjustment

 Brightness

When the video system center is connected to the light source shown in Table 7.4 below, the
brightness of examination light emitted from the distal end of the endoscope is adjusted using the
video system center. This is the same adjustment as that using the light source.When using the light
source other than the ones shown in Table 7.4, the brightness is adjusted as described in
“ Exposure” on page 193.
The lamp brightness is automatically adjusted to keep the brightness of the image consistently when
the light source is set to “AUTO”. The lamp brightness is manually adjusted to keep the lamp
brightness consistently at the setting value when the light source is set to “MANU.”.

Product name Model


VISERA ELITE xenon light source CLV-S190
VISERA Pro xenon light source CLV-S40Pro
EVIS EXERA II xenon light source CLV-180

Table 7.4

WARNING
• When using the endoscope with intense illumination, close viewing of mucous
membranes for a long time may cause mucosal burns. When operating the close
viewing, use the minimum level of illumination or avoid the close viewing for a long
time.
• When using the endoscope with intense illumination, the metal plug of the light
guide and the distal end of the endoscope will be extremely hot while the light
source is ON. Be careful not to contact with the body or any flammable objects.
• Before disconnecting the camera head from the endoscope or disconnecting the
videoscope from the video system center, be sure to set the brightness control Ch.7
mode of the light source to manual mode or turn the examination lamp OFF. The
light intensity can increase to the maximum and may cause burns or eye injury.

NOTE
When the auto/manual brightness button of the light source is set to “AUTO”, the
electronic shutter function is turned OFF automatically.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 191


7.3 Brightness adjustment

1 Set the auto/manual brightness button of the light source to “AUTO” or “MANU.”
according to the instruction manual for the light source.
2 Select the “Brightness adjustment” to display
the “Brightness adjustment” menu as described
in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu
list”.

Figure 7.3

3 Select the setting value with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel and set the
brightness by pressing the “Enter” key.

Setting value Explanation


–8 to +8 (in a step) Select the setting value from –8 to +8.
End (Menu) Return to the endoscope observation screen.
Return (Esc) Return to the menu list.

Table 7.5

4 Select the “End (Menu)” in the menu and press the “Enter” key: the endoscope
observation screen is displayed.

Ch.7 NOTE
• The “Brightness” screen is displayed directly by pressing the “Brightness” key on
the keyboard.
• Each time the arrow key on the keyboard or front panel is pressed, the indicator
changes by 1 level. Pressing and holding the key/button changes the indicator
continuously.
• The “BRIGHTNESS” indicator on the connected light source is interlocked with the
brightness level indicator.
• The brightness adjustment function can be assigned to a custom switch. For
details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

192 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.3 Brightness adjustment

 Exposure

When using a light source other than ones shown in Table 7.4, the exposure is adjusted to brightness
of the endoscopic image. When using the light source shown in Table 7.4, adjust the brightness as
described in “ Brightness” on page 191.

WARNING
• When the brightness level of the light source other then the ones shown in
Table 7.4 is set to a level other then the median of the adjustable range, do not set
the electronic shutter function ON. For details, see “ “Color/Bright.” tab” on
page 112. Intense light which is not recognized clearly may cause burn.
• Always use the minimum level of illumination necessary for adequate viewing.
Whenever possible, avoid close, stationary viewing of mucous membranes for a
long time. Intense endoscopic illumination may cause mucosal burns.
• Do not bring the metal plug of the light guide and the distal end of the endoscope in
contact with the body or any flammable objects immediately after use because the
parts will be extremely hot.
• Before disconnecting the camera head from the endoscope or disconnecting the
videoscope from the video system center, be sure to set the brightness control
mode of the light source to manual mode or turn the examination lamp OFF. The
light intensity can increase to the maximum and may cause burns or eye injury.

NOTE
• When using an endoscope without the electronic shutter function, exposure cannot
be adjusted. Refer to the instruction manual for the endoscope for confirming that
the endoscope has the electronic shutter function.
Ch.7
• When using an endoscope without the electronic shutter function or inactivating the
function, adjust the brightness with the brightness adjustment button on the light
source.

1 Set the electronic shutter function ON (refer to “ “Color/Bright.” tab” on page 112).
2 Press the brightness adjustment button on the light source to set the brightness of
light source to “MANU” mode.
3 Set the brightness level of the light source to the median of the adjustable range.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 193


7.3 Brightness adjustment

4 Select the “Exposure adjustment” to display the


“Exposure” menu as described in Section 7.1,
“Basic operation of the menu list”.

Figure 7.4

5 Select the setting value with the arrow keys on the keyboard or front panel and set the
brightness level by pressing the “Enter” key.

Setting value Explanation


–8 to +8 (in a step) Select the setting value from –8 to +8.

Table 7.6

6 Select the “End (Menu)” and press the “Enter” key: the endoscope observation screen
is displayed.

WARNING
Set the brightness level of the light source to the center of the adjustable range.
The intense light cannot be recognized on the endoscopic image, which may cause
burns, and or appropriate brightness may not be obtained.

Ch.7
NOTE
• Do not set the electronic shutter function to ON in the user settings menu. Intense
light which is not recognized clearly may cause burns.
• The “Exposure” screen is displayed directly by pressing the F2 key on the
keyboard.
• Each time the arrow key on the keyboard or front panel is pressed, the indicator
changes by 1 level. Pressing and holding the button changes the indicator
continuously.
• Depending upon the distance between the distal end of the endoscope and the
object, halation will result. In this case, operate the light source and set the light
intensity manually.
• The exposure adjustment function can be assigned to a custom switch. For details,
see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

194 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.3 Brightness adjustment

 Exposure area

The area measuring the brightness of an endoscopic image is changed to adjust the brightness
automatically.
The iris mode needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance to change the area. For details, see
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the custom switch to which the iris mode is assigned: the iris area is changed,
and the setting condition is displayed for about 2 seconds.
The setting values of the iris mode are shown in Table 7.7.

Window

Figure 7.5

Setting value Explanation


Mask The exposure area is set automatically to obtain optimum
brightness for the subject.
Center Center-weighted measuring.
Full The brightness of the whole image is measured. Ch.7
Table 7.7

NOTE
• The setting value in the user setup is not changed if the iris area is changed.
• The iris mode is activated only when the endoscope compatible with the iris mode
is connected to the video system center.
• “Mask” becomes the same with “Full” for endoscopes of LTF-V3/VP, A500**A
series, and WA500*A series.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 195


7.3 Brightness adjustment

 Electronic shutter

This menu sets whether the electronic shutter function of the endoscope is ON or OFF. The electronic
shutter function need to be assigned to a custom switch in advance to switch the electronic shutter
function. For details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the custom switch to which the electronic shutter function is assigned: the
electronic shutter is changed, and the setting condition is displayed for about
2 seconds on the monitor.
The setting values of the electronic shutter are shown in Table 7.8.

Window

Figure 7.6

Setting value Explanation


On Activates the electronic shutter function.
Off Deactivates the electronic shutter function.

Table 7.8
Ch.7
NOTE
When using an endoscope not compatible with the electronic shutter function of the
video system center, the electronic shutter function does not work even if “On” is
selected.

196 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.3 Brightness adjustment

 Automatic gain control (AGC)

This operation switches the AGC function ON or OFF. The AGC function is used to increase the
brightness of an endoscopic image electrically when the brightness of the image is dark because the
distance between the endoscope’s distal end and the object is too long.
The AGC changing function needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details, see
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the F5 key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the AGC changing
function is assigned: the AGC setting is changed, and it will be displayed in the
monitor screen for about 2 seconds.

F5 key

Keyboard Monitor screen

Figure 7.7

NOTE
• Image noise may appear when AGC is ON.
Ch.7
• Each observation mode can be assigned the AGC setting.
• When the instrument is turned ON, AGC is the last mode in the normal light and
PDD white observations and ON in the NBI observation. Therefore, the NBI images
may have more noise than other images.
• The AGC cannot be changed in the PDD blue observation mode.
• The AGC function cannot be switched ON or OFF while the image is frozen.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 197


7.4 Image enhancement

7.4 Image enhancement

 Image enhancement

The image enhancement modes for the WLI and NBI observation are changed respectively. Three
image enhancement modes are available.
The same image enhancement mode is set for the WLI and PDD observation, but a different mode can
be set for the NBI observation.
For details of setting of the image enhancement, see “ “Enhancement” tab” on page 110.
The image enhancement mode changing function needs to be assigned to a custom switch in
advance. For details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the custom switch to which the image enhancement mode is assigned: the
image enhancement mode is changed. The selected image enhancement mode is
displayed in the image information area of the endoscopic image display.
The enhancement modes are shown in Table 7.9.

Image information
Eh: Structure
enhancement
level
Ed: Edge
enhancement
level

Ch.7

Figure 7.8

Enhancement mode Explanation


1 The image enhancement mode set in Mode 1 of “ “Enhancement” tab” on page 110 in
the user setup menu is reflected.
2 The image enhancement mode set in Mode 2 of “ “Enhancement” tab” on page 110 in
the user setup menu is reflected.
3 The image enhancement mode set in Mode 3 of “ “Enhancement” tab” on page 110 in
the user setup menu is reflected.

Table 7.9

198 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.4 Image enhancement

NOTE
• Setting a too strong structure enhancement may increase the noise in the
endoscopic image.
• Interference may be observed in the image when the image enhancement function
is ON when using a fiberscope. In this case, use one of the recommended camera
head, or set the image enhancement to Level 0.
 OTV-S7H-1N/1D/1NA/1MD
 OTV-S7H-1NA-10E/12E/12Q
 OTV-S7H-1D-F08E/L08E
 OTV-S7H-1FA-E
• The enhancement mode used in the last operation before the instrument is turned
OFF comes up when the instrument is turned ON.

 Contrast mode

This operation changes the contrast of the endoscopic image. The contrast mode can be changed
between “Normal” and the setting value (“High” or “Low”) set in the “Contrast mode” of
“ “Color/Bright.” tab” on page 112.
The contrast mode needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance to change the mode. For
details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the switch to which the contrast mode is assigned: the contrast mode is
changed from “Normal” to “High” or “Normal” to “Low”. The selected contrast mode is
displayed in the image information area of the endoscopic display. Ch.7
The contrast modes are shown in Table 7.10.

Window

Figure 7.9

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 199


7.4 Image enhancement

Contrast mode Explanation


Normal Standard setting
High High darkens the dark part and brightens the bright part
compared to the normal observation.
Low Low brightens the dark part and darkens the bright part
compared to the normal observation.

Table 7.10

NOTE
• The contrast mode function does not work during the optical-digital observation.
• When this video system center is connected to LTF-V series, LTF-S190 series,
WA500 series, A500 series, or camera head, the contrast level cannot be changed,
even if switching the contrast mode between "Low" and "Normal".

 Noise reduction

This operation changes the noise reduction mode that corrects the noise appearing in the normal
observation by image processing. The noise reduction mode needs to be assigned to a custom switch
in advance to change the mode. For details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the switch to which the noise reduction


mode is assigned: the noise reduction mode is
changed, and it will be displayed in the monitor
screen for about 2 seconds.
The setting values of the noise reduction are
Ch.7 shown in Table 7.11.

Figure 7.10

Noise reduction Explanation


ON Enable the noise reduction mode.
OFF Disable the noise reduction mode.

Table 7.11

200 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.5 Color tone adjustment

7.5 Color tone adjustment

 Color tone level adjustment

The “R” (red), “B” (blue), and “C” (chroma) of the endoscopic image on the monitor. The color tone
level can be adjusted in each observation mode.

CAUTION
Be sure to always adjust the white balance before color tone adjustment.

1 Select the “Color tone adjustment” category as described in Section 7.1, “Basic
operation of the menu list” and display the “Color tone adjustment” menu.

Color tone level indicators

Color tone level


adjustment button

Ch.7
Figure 7.11

2 Adjust the color tone, such as “R”, “B”, and “C” with the arrow keys while observing
the endoscopic image.

Color tone Setting value Explanation


R –8 to +8 (in a step) Select the setting value from –8 to +8. The red color tone of the
endoscopic image can be adjusted.
B –8 to +8 (in a step) Select the setting value from –8 to +8. The blue color tone of the
endoscopic image can be adjusted.
C –8 to +8 (in a step) Select the setting value from –8 to +8. The chroma of the
endoscopic image can be adjusted.

Table 7.12

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 201


7.5 Color tone adjustment

3 Select the “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: the
endoscopic image screen is displayed.

NOTE
• The color tone level should be adjusted in each observation mode.
• The color tone used in the last operation before the instrument is turned OFF
comes up when the instrument is turned ON.
• The “Color tone adjustment” menu is displayed or hidden directly by pressing the
F3 key on the keyboard.

Ch.7

202 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.6 Zooming the image

7.6 Zooming the image

 Electronic zoom function

The endoscopic image can electrically be magnified by switching the zoom mode.
The zoom ratios are “x 1.0”, “x 1.2”, and “x 1.5”.
The endoscopic image size does not change.
The electronic zoom function needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details, see
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the “ZOOM” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the electronic
zoom function is assigned: the zoom ratio is displayed in the image information area
of the endoscopic image display.

Image information
“ZOOM” key Z: Zoom ratio

Keyboard Monitor screen Ch.7

Figure 7.12

NOTE
• The electronic zoom function is activated only when the endoscope compatible with
the electronic zoom function is connected to the video system center.
• While the electronic zoom function is activated, the size of the endoscopic image
cannot be changed.
• When the zoom ratio is “× 1.0”, it is not displayed on the monitor.
• When turning ON the video system center, the zoom ratio is always “× 1.0”.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 203


7.7 Changing the endoscopic image display

7.7 Changing the endoscopic image display

 Freeze

Pressing this key pauses the endoscopic live image. The live image is returned by pressing it again
during pausing. The freeze function is used for recording or observation.
The freeze function needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details, see Section 4.7,
“User settings (switch presets)”.

WARNING
If the frozen image does not return to the live image, turn this instrument OFF and
wait for about 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. Also turn all ancillary equipment
OFF then ON again by referring to the respective instruction manuals. If the image
is still frozen, immediately stop using this instrument and withdraw the endoscope
gently from the patient’s body by referring to the instruction manual for the
endoscope.

1 Press the “FREEZE” key on the keyboard or


“FREEZE” key
the custom switch to which the freeze function
is assigned: the endoscopic image is frozen.

Ch.7

Figure 7.13

2 When returning the frozen image to the live image, press the “FREEZE” key on the
keyboard or the custom switch to which the freeze function is assigned again.

NOTE
• When a fast motion is captured, the frozen image may be blurred.
• During freezing, the endoscopic image size and image enhancement can be
changed, and electronic zooming, entering characters, and color adjustment are
available.

204 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.7 Changing the endoscopic image display

 Image size

This operation changes the size of the endoscopic image between “Large” and “Small”.
The image size (“HD” or “SD”) is set in the “user settings” in advance.
The image size changing function needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details,
see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the “IMAGE SIZE” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the
image size changing function is assigned. Each pressing changes the image size.

“IMAGE SIZE” key Image size

Keyboard Small size Large size

Figure 7.14

NOTE
• The resolution of the endoscopic image deteriorates as the image size is
increased.
• The endoscopic image size is set on the HDTV and SDTV outputs respectively.
• The size of the endoscopic image can be changed only when an endoscope Ch.7
compatible with the image size changing function is connected to the video system
center.
• The size of “Large” and “Small” is different depending on the endoscope models.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 205


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

7.8 Changing the displayed text information

 Clearing characters from the screen

This operation hides the text information from the endoscopic image display in each clearing mode.
The clearing characters mode needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details, see
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the “ADD DATA” key on the keyboard or


“ADD DATA” key
the custom switch to which the clearing characters
mode is assigned: the clearing characters mode
changes from mode 1, mode 2, and mode 3 in
order.
The clearing characters modes are shown in
Table 7.13.


Figure 7.15

Clearing characters
Explanation
mode
Mode 1 Full display
Mode 2 All clear
Mode 3 Clear 1, Clear 2, Clear 3, or Custom (depending on the setting
Ch.7 in the “System setup”)

Table 7.13

NOTE
• When "Retain setting" is set to "OFF" in the user settings, the text information is
fully displayed when turning ON the video system center.
• Patient data cannot be input and changed in Mode 2 and 3.
• The full image of image data saved in the portable memory or internal buffer is
displayed in the clearing characters mode which had been set at saving the image
data. Also, pressing the "ADD DATA" key on the keyboard can hide the text
information.

206 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

 Clearing characters mode and text information item

Full
Text information item All clear Clear 1 Clear 2 Clear 3 Custom
display
ID No.  –   – 
Name  –   – 
Sex  – – – – 
Age  – – – – 
D.O.B.  – – – – 
Date  –  – – 
Time  – – – – 
D.F. counter*1  –   – 
CVP counter*2  –  – – 
Memory  –   – 
Enhancement level (structure
 – – – – 
and edge)
Color mode  – – – – 
Electronic zoom level*3      
Comment  –  –  
Cursor  – – –  
Orientation  –   – 
Observation mode indicator*4  –   – 
 Display – Clear  Optional setting

Table 7.14

*1 Not displayed when the setting value of the digital filing system is set to "None".
*2 Not displayed when the setting value of the printer is set to "None"
Ch.7
*3 Not displayed when the zoom ratio is “×1.0”
*4 Not displayed in the WLI observation mode.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 207


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

 Cursor

This operation switches the cursor display on the screen between ON and OFF.

 Operation by the keyboard

Press the “CURSOR” key on the keyboard:


“CURSOR” key
each pressing changes the cursor on the
screen between displayed or hidden.

Figure 7.16

 Operation by the “Function Operation Panel” menu

1 Select the “Function Operation Panel” to display the “Function Operation Panel” as
described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list”.

Ch.7

Figure 7.17

2 Select “Cursor [ON  OFF]” on the “Functional operation panel” and press the
“ENTER” button on the front panel: the cursor on the screen is switched between
displayed and hidden.

208 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

NOTE
• The cursor is hidden while displaying the arrow pointer.
• The cursor is not displayed except when the clearing characters mode is set to
“Mode 1” or “Mode3 : clear3”.

 Displaying the endoscope information window

This operation displays endoscope information. When using the endoscope having the endoscope
information function, “Endoscope’s instrument channel information”, “Endoscope information”, and
“Scope switch assignment” are displayed in the endoscopic image display. When using the endoscope
not having the endoscope information function, only “Scope switch assignment” is displayed.

Press the “MENU” key twice on the keyboard or front panel: the “Scope switch
assignment”, “Endoscope information”, and “Endoscope’s instrument channel
information” are displayed on the monitor for about 5 seconds.

1
“MENU” key

Ch.7
Keyboard 2
Monitor screen

Figure 7.18

No. Item Explanation


1 Endoscope’s instrument channel Display the position that a diameter of the instrument channel and an
information EndoTherapy accessory can be seen.
2 Scope switch assignment Display the setting of custom switches.
3 Endoscope information Display the serial number, a diameter of the instrument channel, a
diameter of the distal end, and a diameter of the insertion tube of the
endoscope.

Table 7.15

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 209


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

NOTE
When “ ” is displayed at the right of the endoscope information, it indicates that
the endoscope in use does not apply to high frequency cauterization.

 Displaying the custom switch information window

This operation displays setting information about assigned functions to the custom switches, such as
the remote switches on the endoscope, foot switches, “OPTION” keys on the keyboard, and
“CUSTOM” buttons on the front panel.

1 Press the “SWITCH INFO” key: setting information about assigned functions to the
custom switches is displayed.

“SWITCH INFO” key

Keyboard
Monitor screen

Ch.7 Figure 7.19

No. Item Explanation


1 Setting information of the remote Display the assigned functions to the remote switches.
switches on the endoscope
2 Setting information of the “CUSTOM” Display the assigned functions to the “CUSTOM” buttons.
buttons on the front panel
3 Setting information of the “OPTION” Display the assigned functions to the “OPTION” keys.
keys on the keyboard
4 Setting information of the foot Display the assigned functions to the foot switches.
switches

Table 7.16

210 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

2 Pressing the remote switches on the endoscope, foot switches, “OPTION” keys on
the keyboard, and “CUSTOM” buttons on the front panel highlights the corresponding
one on the monitor while custom switch information is displayed on the screen as
shown in Figure 7.19.

NOTE
• Even if the remote switches on the endoscope, foot switches, “OPTION” keys on
the keyboard, and “CUSTOM” buttons on the front panel is pressed while setting
information is displayed on the screen, the corresponding one is only highlighted on
the screen, not operated.
• Pressing the “SWITCH INFO” key on the keyboard again displays the endoscopic
image display.
• Foot switch “1” and “2” displayed in the custom switch information window indicate
functions assigned to the foot switches connected to the video system center, and
foot switch “3” and “4” displayed in the custom switch information window indicate
functions assigned to the foot switches connected to the light source.

 Arrow pointer

This operation displays the arrow pointer on the endoscopic image.

 Operation by the keyboard

1 Press the “Shift” and any arrow key together: the arrow pointer appears in center of Ch.7
the endoscopic image.

Arrow pointer

“Shift” keys Arrow keys

Keyboard Monitor screen

Figure 7.20

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 211


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

2 Move the arrow pointer using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
3 Press the “Shift” key and arrow key together to change the direction of the arrow
pointer.

Arrow pointer To display and change To hide


Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together The arrow pointer is hidden by pressing the
when the arrow pointer is hidden. “Shift” and “ ” keys together or pressing
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together the “Shift” and “ ” keys together.
when “ ” is displayed.
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together
when “ ” is displayed.
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together The arrow pointer disappears by pressing
when the arrow pointer is hidden. the “Shift” and “ ” keys together or
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together pressing the “Shift” and “ ” keys together.
when “ ” is displayed.
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together
when “ ” is displayed.
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together to The arrow pointer disappears by pressing
display the arrow pointer. the “Shift” and “ ” keys together or
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together pressing the “Shift” and “ ” keys together.
when “ ” is displayed.
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together
when “ ” is displayed.
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together to The arrow pointer disappears by pressing
display the arrow pointer. the “Shift” and “ ” keys together or
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together pressing the “Shift” and “ ” keys together.
when “ ” is displayed.
Press the “Shift” and “ ” keys together
when “ ” is displayed.
Ch.7
Table 7.17

212 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

 Operation by the “Function Operation Panel” menu

1 Select the “Function Operation Panel” to display the “Function Operation Panel” as
described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list”.

Figure 7.21

2 Select the “Arrow pointer” and press the “ENTER” button on the front panel: the arrow
pointer is displayed in the center of the endoscopic image.
3 Move the arrow pointer using the arrow keys on the front panel.
4 When hiding the arrow pointer, press the “MENU” button on the front panel.

NOTE
• The arrow pointer disappears when the endoscopic image screen once changes to
the other menu and returns to the endoscopic image screen.
• The direction of the arrow pointer cannot be changed unless the keyboard is
connected. Ch.7
• The arrow pointer appears only on the endoscopic image.
• The arrow pointer moves faster than usual by pressing the arrow key long.
• The cursor is hidden to avoid entering characters during appearing the arrow
pointer.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 213


7.8 Changing the displayed text information

 Displaying the hardware information

This operation displays the hardware information of the video system center and equipment.

1 Select “Hardware” as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list” and
press the “Enter” key: the hardware information is displayed on the monitor.

Figure 7.22

2 Select “Back (Esc)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard:
the menu list is displayed.

Ch.7

214 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.9 Changing the observation mode

7.9 Changing the observation mode

 Changing the observation mode (“WLI”, “NBI”, “PDD”)

This operation changes the observation mode to the one corresponding to the endoscope to be used
when connecting the xenon light source (CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro or CLV-180) to the video system
center.
The observation mode changing function needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For
details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

WARNING
• The endoscopic image may not be visible at the moment the observation mode is
switched. Therefore, do not use the endoscope or perform a procedure while
switching the observation modes. Injury inside the body cavity may result.
• If any irregularity in the endoscopic image is observed during the optical-digital
observation, immediately return to the normal light observation mode. Injury inside
the body cavity may result.
• Do not rely on the optical-digital observation alone for primary detection of lesions
or for a decision regarding any potential diagnostic or therapeutic intervention.

NOTE
• The tone and the brightness of the endoscopic image of the optical-digital
observation are different from the normal light observation. Please use the
optical-digital observation after understanding the property of each optical-digital
observation. Ch.7
• The observation mode cannot be changed when the endoscopic image is frozen.
• The optical-digital observation and normal light observation mode can be changed
during an examination.
• The keyboard and switches cannot be operated while the observation mode is
changed.
• The observation mode can be selected using a button on the front panel of the light
source. Please refer to the instruction manual for the light source.
• The observation mode indicator at the upper right of the monitor can be set to be
hidden in the user settings.
• Contact Olympus for further information about the optical-digital observation.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 215


7.9 Changing the observation mode

 Confirm the available optical-digital observation

Confirm the available optical-digital observations indicated on the front panel of the light source. For
details, see “ Confirming the available observation mode” on page 160.

 NBI observation

WARNING
If the endoscopic image seems to be dark in the NBI observation, change to the
normal observation. Otherwise, the examination might not be performed safely.

CAUTION
Perform the white balance adjustment. Otherwise, the NBI observation cannot be
performed with a correct color tone.

 Operation by the keyboard or custom switches

1 Press the “NBI” key on the keyboard or custom switch to which the NBI mode function
is assigned: the observation mode changes to the NBI mode and the observation
mode indicator shows NBI at the upper right of the endoscopic image display.

Observation mode indicator


“WLI” key “NBI” key

Ch.7

Keyboard Monitor screen

Figure 7.23

2 When the observation mode is returned to the normal light mode, press the “WLI” key
on the keyboard or custom switch to which the NBI mode function is assigned.

216 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.9 Changing the observation mode

 Operation by the “Function Operation Panel” menu

1 Select the “Function Operation Panel” to display the “Function Operation Panel” as
described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list”.

Figure 7.24

2 Select the “NBI” with the arrow keys on the front panel and press the “Enter” key: the
observation mode is changed to the NBI observation mode, the observation mode
indicator shows “NBI” at the upper right of the endoscopic image display.

Observation mode
indicator

Ch.7

Figure 7.25

3 When returning the observation mode to the WLI observation mode, select “WLI” in
the function operation panel and press the “Enter” key.

NOTE
• In the NBI mode, residual debris and bile may be seen dark red.
• Contrast and color mode cannot be operated during the NBI observation.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 217


7.9 Changing the observation mode

 NBI color mode

The NBI color mode can be changed manually.


The NBI color mode needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details, see Section 4.7,
“User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the custom switch to which the NBI color mode is assigned: the NBI color mode
is changed, and the selected NBI color mode is indicated in the image information.
The NBI color modes are shown in Table 7.18.

NBI color mode


Cm: 1

Figure 7.26

Color mode Explanation


Mode 1 Color for general purpose. This is standard color for EndoEYE series,
LTF series, and ENF series.
Mode 2 Not used. (The same color tone as Mode 1.)

Ch.7 Mode 3 Proper color tone to observe an object with much residual debris. The
standard color tone for CYF and URF series.

Table 7.18

218 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.9 Changing the observation mode

 PDD (Photo Dynamic Diagnosis) observation

CAUTION
When performing the PDD observation, use the light guide and light source
compatible with the PDD observation. Using the video system center with
equipment not having the PDD function may cause improper observation.

Turning ON the video system center connected with a camera head for PDD activates the PDD mode.
The PDD observation mode has the following 2 modes shown in Table 7.19.

PDD mode Explanation


PDD White Normal observation using white light
PDD Blue PDD1 Fluorescence observation using excitation light
PDD2 Displays a brighter image than PDD1.

Table 7.19

 Operation by the keyboard or custom switches

1 Confirm that the observation mode indicator of the light source lights up “PDD” as
described in the instruction manual for the light source.
2 Press the “PDD” key on the keyboard or custom switch to which the PDD mode
function is assigned: the observation mode changes to the PDD blue mode and the
observation mode indicator shows PDD at the upper right of the endoscopic image
display.
Ch.7
Observation mode indicator

“PDD gain” key “PDD” key

Keyboard
Monitor screen

Figure 7.27

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 219


7.9 Changing the observation mode

3 Press “PDD gain” key on the keyboard or custom switch to which the PDD gain
function is assigned: the PDD mode changes to the PDD blue 1 or PDD blue 2 mode.

PDD Blue

PDD1

PDD mode PDD gain PDD mode


PDD White
switch switch switch

PDD2

The initial mode (PDD1 or PDD2) is set in the user settings menu.

Figure 7.28

4 When returning the observation mode to the PDD White mode, press the “WLI” key
on the keyboard or custom switch to which the PDD mode function is assigned.

 Operation by the “Function Operation Panel” menu

1 Confirm that the observation mode indicator of the light source lights up “PDD” as
described in the instruction manual for the light source.
2 Select the “Function Operation Panel” to display the “Function Operation Panel” as
described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list”.

Ch.7

Figure 7.29

220 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.9 Changing the observation mode

3 Select the “PDD1” or “PDD2” with the arrow keys on the front panel and press the
“Enter” key: the observation mode is changed to the PDD Blue mode, the observation
mode indicator shows “PDD1” or “PDD2” at the upper right of the endoscopic image
display.

Observation mode
indicator

Figure 7.30

PDD Blue
PDD 1 PDD1
switch
PDD 2
PDD White switch PDD 1 WLI switch
switch
PDD 2
switch PDD2

The initial mode (PDD1 or PDD2) is set in the user settings menu.

Figure 7.31 Ch.7

4 When returning the observation mode to the PDD White mode, select “WLI” in the
function operation panel and press the “Enter” key.

NOTE
• In the PDD mode, when a distant place is observed and the brightness of the
endoscopic image is dark, AGC is strong and noise may be observed in the
endoscopic image. In this case, the noise can be reduced by approaching
membrane and making the endoscopic image bright.
• Contrast and color mode cannot be operated during the “PDD Blue” observation.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 221


7.10 Recording the frozen image (releasing)

7.10 Recording the frozen image (releasing)

The endoscopic frozen images are recorded on the recording devices shown in Table 7.20.
The recording device needs to be connected and set in advance to record the endoscopic images.
For assigning the recording device to “RELEASE 1” or “RELEASE 2” key on the keyboard, refer to
Section 4.4, “System setup (connection setting)” and “ “Release 1” tab” on page 106.
The freeze and release functions needs to be assigned to custom switches. For details, see
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Image recording device Reference


Portable memory  See Section 7.11, “Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable
memory or internal buffer)” on page 223.
Video printer See Section 7.13, “Remotely controlling the video printer” on page 254.

Table 7.20

1 Press the “FREEZE” key: the endoscopic


“FREEZE” key “RELEASE” key
image is frozen.

Ch.7 Figure 7.32

2 Check the frozen image if it is suitable to record. If not, press the “FREEZE” key again
to return to the live image and repeat Steps 1 and 2.
3 Press the “RELEASE” key on the keyboard (see Figure 7.32): recording the images
starts, and the live image returns. Recording may take several seconds.

NOTE
• When recording without using the “FREEZE” key on the keyboard, press the
“RELEASE” key first. The image is frozen for the release time and returns to the
live image. For setting the release time, refer to “ “Release time H” tab” on
page 86.
• When recording without using the “FREEZE” key on the keyboard, maintain
intervals of 1 second or more between each press of the “RELEASE” key. If the
intervals are shorter than 1 second, the images may not be recorded.

222 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• When pressing the “FREEZE”, “CAPTURE” or “RELEASE” key on the keyboard,
do not move the endoscope as much as possible to record the images free from
blurredness.
• When pressing the “RELEASE” key on the keyboard, the captured image is
displayed as an index image.
• When performing a release without an endoscope or camera head connected, an
image of the colorbar is recorded.

7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image


(portable memory or internal buffer)

The frozen images are recorded or played back using a portable memory.
Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port in advance. When the portable memory is
not inserted, the frozen images are recorded to the internal buffer.

CAUTION
• Be sure to format the portable memory before recording images. Otherwise,
recording cannot be performed properly. For details, see “ Formatting the portable
memory” on page 227.
• Be sure to format the portable memory by the video system center. If it is formatted
by a device, such as the personal computer, recording or playback cannot be
performed. Ch.7
• Do not give any impact to the portable memory. The memory or data may be
damaged.
• Do not leave the portable memory in a place under strong static electricity,
electromagnetic waves, magnetism, high temperatures, high humidity, or corrosive
atmosphere.
• Do not touch the portable memory with wet hands. The memory and video system
center may be damaged.
• This portable memory has been designed to be used for temporarily saving
endoscopic images, patient data, and setting information. For long-term storage,
use a personal computer.
• Delete the data in the portable memory immediately after using the portable
memory. The leakage of patient data may result.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 223


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• See the following pages for details on how to record the portable memory.
 Images:
See “ Recording the frozen image to the memory” on page 230.
 System setup:
See “ Saving the system setup to the portable memory” on page 77.
See “ Loading the system setup from the portable memory” on page 78.
 User settings:
See “ Saving the user settings to the portable memory” on page 97.
See “ Loading the user settings from the portable memory” on page 100.
 Patient data:
See “ Saving patient data to the portable memory” on page 268.
See “ Calling patient data” on page 267.
• Use only the portable memory from Olympus. Other portable memories might not
work properly.
• Always prepare spare portable memories for use when the currently used portable
memory becomes full.
• Edit operations cannot be performed during on examination.Finish the examination
by pressing the “EXAM” key.

Ch.7

224 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory


port

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port until it stops.

Access indicator

LED of the portable


memory

Portable memory

Portable memory slot

Figure 7.33

2 The video system center recognizes the portable memory, and the access indicator
lights up green (see Figure 7.33).
The indicator and LED of the portable memory show the status as shown in
Table 7.21.

Indication part Status Status


Access indicator OFF No portable memory in the port, or the video system center does not
recognize the portable memory.
ON The video system center has recognized the portable memory and can
record the frozen images.
Blinking The video system center is accessing the portable memory.
LED of the portable OFF The video system center is not accessing the portable memory. Ch.7
memory Blinking The video system center is accessing the portable memory.

Table 7.21

CAUTION
• Do not allow a foreign object to penetrate the inside of the portable memory port.
The video system center may be damaged.
• The portable memory is jutting from the front panel. Do not give any impact to the
portable memory. The memory or data may be damaged. Also, remove the portable
memory when it is not used.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 225


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• If the video system center does not recognize the portable memory, remove and
reinsert the portable memory and turn the video system center OFF then ON again.
• It is recommended to move image data in the portable memory to a personal
computer regularly.

 Removing the portable memory from the portable memory


port

1 Confirm that the access indicator on the front panel or LED of the portable memory is
not blinking.

Access indicator

Access stop button

Portable memory

LED of the portable


memory

Figure 7.34

CAUTION

Ch.7 If removing the portable memory or turning the equipment OFF while the access
indicator or the LED of the portable memory is blinking, press the access stop
button so that the blinking finishes.The memory and/or data may be damaged or
the data may be erased.

2 Pull the portable memory straight out.

226 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Formatting the portable memory

According to “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on page 225, insert the
portable memory into the portable memory port on the front panel in advance.

CAUTION
• Be sure to format the portable memory by the video system center. If it is formatted
by a device, such as the personal computer, recording or playback cannot be
performed. The portable memory formatted by the personal computer needs to be
formatted by the video system center again.
• Formatting a portable memory deletes all data saved in the portable memory.

1 Select the “PM formatting” as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu
list”: a confirmation message box is displayed.
2 Select the “Yes” on the screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: formatting
the portable memory starts.
The access indicator on the front panel blinks and a message, “Please wait a while”,
appears on the screen while formatting. the access indicator lights up, and a
message, “It completed”, appears on the screen after formatting has completed.

NOTE
• When formatting is cancelled, select the “No” while a confirmation message box is
displayed. The Menu list screen is displayed.
• If the formatting failed, a message, “Failed in format”, appears on the screen. In this
case, the portable memory may be destroyed. Use a new one.
Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 227


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Checking the portable memory

Perform functional checks on the portable memory.


According to “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on page 225, insert the
portable memory into the portable memory port on the front panel in advance.

CAUTION
• Do not press the “Access stop” button while formatting the portable memory. The
portable memory and data in the portable memory may be destroyed.
• Formatting a portable memory deletes all data saved in the portable memory.

1 Select the “Portable memory test” as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the
menu list”: a confirmation message box is displayed.
2 Select the “Yes” on the screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: checking
the portable memory starts. The “Access indicator” on the front panel blinks and a
message, “Please wait a while”, appears on the screen while checking, and a
message, “Portable memory test was successful”, appears on the screen after
completion of checking and finding that the portable memory is normal.
3 If any irregularity is observed on the portable memory after checking, a message,
“Format portable memory?” appears on the screen.
4 Select the “Yes” on the screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: formatting
the portable memory starts. The “Access indicator” on the front panel blinks and a
message, “Please wait a while”, appears on the screen while formatting. The “Access
indicator” lights up, and a message, “It completed”, appears on the screen after
formatting has completed.
Ch.7
NOTE
• When formatting is cancelled, select the “No” while a confirmation message box is
displayed. The menu list screen is displayed.
• If the formatting failed, a message, “Failed in format”, appears on the screen. In this
case, the portable memory may be destroyed. Use a new one.

228 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Remaining capacity indicator of the portable memory

Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port: the remaining capacity of
the portable memory is displayed on the monitor.
A warning message appears on the monitor when the portable memory is full.

Remaining capacity
indicator
/ (XXX/XXX)

For internal The number of


buffer transferred
releases

For portable The total number


memory of releases

Figure 7.35

NOTE
When the portable memory is not inserted into the portable memory port, the
remaining capacity of the internal buffer is displayed on the monitor.

Rough number of recordable images


Display Note
Portable memory Internal buffer
600 or more releases Less than 160 releases Ch.7
Less than 600 releases Less than 160 releases
Less than 400 releases Less than 120 releases xx is the number of availability for releasing.
xx Less than 80 releases Less than 80 releases
Full Storage device is full. Storage device is full.

Table 7.22

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 229


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• The numeric value is an estimate. It may be different from the actual number.
• The storage capacity depends on the data compression rate.
• The remaining capacity is a rough estimation based on the recording format.
Prepare spare portable memories before it runs out of space.
• If the remaining capacity of the internal buffer become 80 and 40 releases, a
message appears on the screen.
• If the remaining capacity of the portable memory becomes 40 releases,a message
appears on the screen.
• Up to 999 release operations can be performed per an examination.

 Recording the frozen image to the memory

The portable memory is inserted into the portable memory port on the video system center in advance
as described in “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on page 225.
Also, the “PM” is assigned to “RELEASE 1” or “RELEASE 2” as described in “ “Release 1” tab” on
page 106.
The frozen images are recorded to the portable memory as described in Section 7.10, “Recording the
frozen image (releasing)”.

CAUTION
• Do not turn OFF the video system center for about 3 seconds after releasing.
• When release actions are operated successively, an error message is displayed
Ch.7 and release actions may become disable. Operate release actions again after a
while.

NOTE
It takes several seconds to record the images depending on endoscope, recording
format, and object. Particularly, HDTV and TIFF images may take longer time to be
recorded.

230 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Basic operation on thumbnail screen

The images stored in the portable memory or internal buffer are played back, printed out, or deleted.
Operations of both the portable memory and internal buffer are explained in this chapter.
The portable memory is inserted into the portable memory port on the video system center in advance
as described in “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on page 225.

1 Select “Image viewing” in the menu as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of
the menu list”: the “View buffer images” screen is displayed.

Figure 7.36

2 When displaying the image list saved in the portable memory, select the “Memory (P)”
button on the screen with the arrow keys (see Figure 7.36) and press the “Enter” key
on the keyboard: the “View memory images” screen is displayed.

Ch.7

Figure 7.37

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 231


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

3 Select any operation in Table 7.23 with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard. Follow the instructions for the selected operation.

Operation button Explanation


End (Menu) Returns to the endoscopic live image.
Back (Esc) Returns to the menu list.
Memory (P) Display the “View memory images” screen.
This is indicated only in the “View buffer images” screen.
Internal (I) Display the “View buffer images” screen.
This is indicated only in the “View memory images > Thumbnails” screen.
Select (S) Displays the thumbnail index of the data folder selected.
See Step 4 below.
Edit (E) Edit the folder information.
See “ Deleting the data including a folder” on page 240.
See “ Transferring the internal buffer folder” on page 241.

Table 7.23

4 Select the “Select (S)” on the screen with the arrow keys (see Figure 7.37) and press
the “Enter” key on the keyboard.
5 Select a folder from the date and patient name lists with the arrow keys (see
Figure 7.37) and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the thumbnail images of the
selected data is displayed.(see Figure 7.38)

Ch.7

232 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• The information of the selected patient data is displayed at the lower end of the
screen. (See Figure 7.37)
• The latest data comes the first in the list.
• The patient name corresponding to the date is displayed in the patient name list.

Figure 7.38

6 Select any operation in Table 7.24 with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard. Follow the instructions for the selected operation.

Operation button Explanation


End (Menu) Returns to the endoscopic live image.
Ch.7
Back (Esc) Returns to the menu list.
Memory (P) Display the “View memory images” screen. This is indicated only in the “View buffer
images > Thumbnail” screen.
Internal (I) Display the “View buffer images” screen.
This is indicated only in the “View memory images > Thumbnails” screen.
Display (V) Display the images.
See “ Operation on the image screen” on page 235.
Annotate (A) Edit the folder information.
See “ Generating and storing the annotation images” on page 238.
Delete (D) Delete the image.
See Step 6 below.

Table 7.24

7 When deleting the image, select the “Delete (D)” on the screen with the arrow keys on
the keyboard and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 233


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

8 Select the image to be deleted with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the
keyboard: the image is selected.
9 Select “Execute (R)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key: a confirmation
message box is displayed.
10 Select the “Yes” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the
displayed image, including its patient data and comments is deleted.

NOTE
• Annotation data is indicated as an icon, not as an image on the thumbnail screen.
• The aspect ratio of a thumbnail image depends on the endoscope used.
• For the details of the folder names on the internal buffer screen, refer to “ Image
files and folders” on page 243.
• When transferring or saving is cancelled, select the “No” while a confirmation
message box is displayed. The confirmation message box disappears.
• The file name of the image data which has been transferred to the portable memory
turns gray on the thumbnail screen of images in the internal buffer.

Ch.7

234 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Operation on the image screen

Playback the image in the portable memory. Operations of both the portable memory and internal
buffer are explained in this section.

1 Display the “View memory images > Thumbnails” screen or the “View buffer images >
Thumbnails” screen as described in “ Basic operation on thumbnail screen” on
page 231.

Figure 7.39

2 Select any thumbnail images to be displayed after selecting “Display” on the screen
and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard (see Figure 7.39): the thumbnail images
are selected. When selecting plural images of an arbitrary number, repeat the above
mentioned operation.
When selecting all the images, select “ALL” on the screen, and press the “Enter” key
on the key board.
Ch.7
3 Select “Execute (R)” on the screen with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard.

㻹㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻟㻝
㻝㻝㻛㻝㻝㻛㻝㻥㻣㻥

Figure 7.40

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 235


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

4 Press the “Enter” key on the keyboard while displaying the full image: the “View
memory images > Thumb. > View” screen is displayed.

Figure 7.41

5 Select any operation in Table 7.25 with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard. Follow the instructions for the selected operation.

Operation button Explanation


End (Menu) Returns to the endoscopic live image.
Back (Esc) Displays the thumbnail index of the data folder selected.
If more than one thumbnail image is selected, display the
previous screen.
If more than one thumbnail image is selected, display the next
screen.
Full Display the full image.
Ch.7
Table 7.25

CAUTION
• The images edited by a personal computer or an instrument other than the video
system center cannot be played back.

NOTE
• The images recorded by an instrument other than this video system center cannot
be played back.
• Images saved in both folder formats “DCF” and “Date and ID” can be played back
in the playback screen. Refer to “ “Record setting” tab” on page 83.
• In the “View memory images > Thumb. > View” screen, all images recorded in the
full-height or full size are scaled down and displayed on the constant display area.

236 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• An image can be also deleted in the “View memory images > Thumbnails” screen.
For details, see “ Basic operation on thumbnail screen” on page 231.
• The file name of the image data which has been transferred to the portable memory
turns gray on the thumbnail screen of images in the internal buffer.

Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 237


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Generating and storing the annotation images

This function selects up to four frozen endoscopic images from a file, arranges them onto a sheet, and
stores it as a file in the same folder. Some comments can be added to each image. Operations of both
the portable memory and internal buffer are explained in this chapter.

1 Display the “View memory images > Thumbnails” screen or “View buffer images >
Thumbnails” screen as described in “ Basic operation on thumbnail screen” on
page 231.

Figure 7.42

2 Select the “Annotate (A)” on the screen (see Figure 7.42) and press the “Enter” key
on the keyboard.
3 Select the desired images to be annotated with the arrow keys and press the “Enter”
key on the keyboard: the images are selected.
Ch.7
NOTE
• The operation of selecting is just for selecting the images, not for making them into
annotation images.
• Pressing the “Enter” key on the keyboard again while selecting the images cancels
the selection.
• Click “<” or “>” to scroll the thumbnail images if necessary.

4 Select the images as well when other images need to be arranged into the annotation.

NOTE
• Up to four images can be selected for the annotation.
• Transferred images cannot be selected.

238 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

5 After selecting all images to be arranged into the annotation, select the “Execute (R)”
at the lower right of the screen with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the
keyboard: the Annotation preview screen is displayed.

title

Figure 7.43

6 When titling an annotation image, select the title box with the arrow keys and press
the "Enter" key on the keyboard to enter the title.

Ch.7

Figure 7.44

7 Select any operation in Table 7.26 with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard. Follow the instructions for the selected operation.

Operation button Explanation


End (Menu) Returns to the endoscopic live image.
Back (Esc) Returns to the “View memory images > Thumbnails”.
Save Save the annotation image.
 See Step 8 below.

Table 7.26

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 239


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

8 Select the “Save” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard
when saving the annotation image: a confirmation message box is displayed.
9 Select the “Yes” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the
annotation image, including patient data and comments is saved.

 Deleting the data including a folder

This operation deletes the folders and image files in the portable memory or internal buffer. Operations
of both the portable memory and internal buffer are explained in this chapter.

CAUTION
Confirm in advance if the selected folder should be deleted. The deleted folder
cannot be restored.

1 Select the “Edit” on the “View memory images” screen or “Buffer folder list” and press
the “Enter” key on the keyboard as described in “ Basic operation on thumbnail
screen” on page 231: the “View memory images > Manage” or “View buffer images >
Manage” screen is displayed. (See Figure 7.45)
2 When deleting the folders including image files, select the “Delete (Del)” on the
screen with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard.

Ch.7

Figure 7.45

3 Select the folders from the folder list with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard: the folder to be deleted are selected.
4 Select “Execute (R)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: a
confirmation message box is displayed.

240 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

5 Select the “Yes” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the selected folder and
images in it are deleted.

NOTE
• When deleting is cancelled, select the “No” while a confirmation message box is
displayed. The “View memory images > Manage” screen is displayed.
• When returning to the endoscopic image display, select the “End (Menu)” on the
screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard.
• When returning to the “View memory images” screen or “View buffer images”,
select the “Back (Esc)” on the screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard.

 Transferring the internal buffer folder

This operation transfers the folders and image files in the internal buffer.

1 Select the “Edit (E)” on the “View buffer images” screen and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard as described in “ Basic operation on thumbnail screen” on page 231:
the “View buffer images > Manage” screen is displayed. Showing the folders
containing images that have not been transferred yet.

Ch.7

Figure 7.46

2 Select the “Yes” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the folder and images in it
are transferred to the portable memory.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 241


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• When transferring or deleting is cancelled, select the “No” while a confirmation
message box is displayed. The confirmation message box disappears.
• When aborting transfer in the middle, select “Cancel (Esc)”.
• When returning to the endoscopic image display, select the “End (Menu)” on the
screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard.
• When returning to the “View buffer images” screen, select the “Back (Esc)” on the
screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard.
• The file name of the image data which has been transferred to the portable memory
turns gray on the thumbnail screen of images in the internal buffer.
• On the “View buffer images” screen, the folder names of the images which have
already been transferred to the portable memory are grayed out.
• If there is no folder containing non-transferred images in the internal buffer, “Edit
(E)” is grayed out so the “Edit” screen cannot be displayed.
• If the portable memory is inserted in the middle of an examination, the images
recorded during they are automatically transferred to the portable memory.

Ch.7

242 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Image files and folders

The endoscopic image files on the portable memory are automatically stored to the folder generated by
the video system center. A created folder name changes depending on the setting of the saved folder
format of the endoscopic image. Refer to “ “Record setting” tab” on page 83.

 When the save folder format is “DCF”

(a) Folder configuration

㻼㼛㼞㼠㼍㼎㼘㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥

㻰㻯㻵㻹

㻝㻜㻜㻻㻸㻯㼂㻝
㻟㻜㻜㻴㻜㻜㻜㻝㻚 㼖㼜㼓
㻟㻜㻜㻿㻜㻜㻜㻝㻚 㼖㼜㼓

㻟㻜㻜㻴㻜㻜㻜㻝㻚㼀㻵㻲
㻟㻜㻜㻿㻜㻜㻜㻝㻚㼀㻵㻲

㻝㻜㻜㻻㻸㻯㼂㻝
㻻㻸㼅㻹㻜㻜㻜㻝㻚 㼖㼜㼓
Ch.7

㻻㻸㼅㻹㻜㻜㻜㻠㻚 㼖㼜㼓

㻻㻸㼅㻹㻜㻜㻜㻡㻚 㼖㼜㼓

㻻㻸㼅㻹㻜㻜㻜㻤㻚 㼖㼜㼓
㻝㻜㻝㻻㻸㻯㼂㻝
㻝㻜㻝㻻㻸㻯㼂㻝
㻯㼂

Figure 7.47

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 243


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

(b) Examination image folder (DCIM)


The examination information such as image files recorded at releasing, administrative
information for playing back, and annotation image files edited from image files is stored in the
examination image folder.

NOTE
• The data in the DCIM folder is in conformity with the DCF standard for digital
cameras (Except for the annotation image folder).
• When an examination for one patient is performed in between two examinations of
another patient on the same day, two folders with the same examination date and
patient ID are created for later the patient.

(c) Examination folder (100OLCV1-999OLCV1)


An examination folder to which the examination information is stored is generated per
examination. The folder is named as below.
• nnnOLCV1: “nnn” is the three-digit number (from 100 to 999)

NOTE
When an examination folder whose examination date and patient ID are the same
has already been created in the portable memory, a new examination folder will be
created and “nnn” of the folder name is altered to the next higher digit.

(d) Files
The image files are named as below:

Ch.7 • SDTV image 300Snnnn.jpg: “nnnn” is a four-digit number (in numerical order).
• HDTV image 300Hnnnn.jpg: “nnnn” is a four-digit number (in numerical order).

When selecting “TIFF” as a file format, a extension becomes “.tif”.

(e) Annotation image folder (100OLCV1-999OLCV1)


An annotation image folder which the selected image files in the “Annotation edit” screen are
stored to when the annotation images are generated. Up to 4 images are selected by annotation
operation. However, up to 8 images can be stored because there are images for HDTV and
SDTV respectively. The folder is named as below.
• nnnOLCV1: “nnn” is the three-digit number (from 100 to 999)

(f) System administrative information folders (CV)


System data, such as each setting information is stored to the folders.

244 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

NOTE
• The data in the DCIM folder (except a browsing file, such as “ExamLink.htm”) is in
conformity with the DCF standard (image format for digital cameras).
• When entering the same patient ID twice on a day, a new folder with the same ID
and date will be generated if an examination has taken place in between the two
examinations.
• The maximum number of image files recorded in a folder is 9,999. The maximum
number of folders in a portable memory is 900. The total volume of image data
cannot exceed the amount of memory of the portable memory.
• The recording speed decelerates when the number of images in a folder exceeds
100 or when the number of folders in a portable memory exceeds 100.

Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 245


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 When the save folder format is “Date and ID”

(a) Folder configuration

Ch.7

Figure 7.48

(b) Examination image folder (ExamImage)


The examination information such as image files recorded at releasing and annotation image
files edited from image files is stored in the examination image folder.

246 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

(c) Examination date folder (YYYYMMDD)


An examination date folder is created for each examination date. The examination information
on the same examination date is stored to the folder. The folder is named as eight digits in the
order of YYYY, MM, and DD.

NOTE
The examination date folder is created only if the save folder format is “Date and
ID”.

(d) Examination folder


• YYYYMMDDhhmmss_PatientID_nnn
• YYYYMMDDhhmmss: Exam start date (YYYY/MM/DD/hh:mm:ss)
• ID: Patient ID
• nnn: The figures from 001 to 999.

NOTE
• Only half-width characters can be used for a folder name. When other characters
and symbols (“/” “:” “*” “?” “” ” “<” “>” “|” “#” “%”) are used for a patient ID, those
characters are converted to “_” (under score)”.
• When examining without entering a patient ID, an examination folder will be
created as “YYYYMMDDhhmmss_nnnn”.
• When an examination folder whose examination date and patient ID are the same
has already been created in the portable memory, a new examination folder will be
created and nnn of the folder name is altered to the next higher digit. Ch.7

(e) Examination image files


The image files are named as below:

• SDTV image 200Snnnn.jpg: “nnnn” is a four-digit number (in numerical order).


• HDTV image 200Hnnnn.jpg: “nnnn” is a four-digit number (in numerical order).

When selecting “TIFF” as a file format, the extension becomes “.tif”.

(f) Annotation image folder (100OLCV1-999OLCV1)


An annotation image folder which the selected image files in the “Annotation edit” screen are
stored to when the annotation images are generated. Up to 4 images are selected by annotation
operation. However, up to 8 images can be stored because there are images for HDTV and
SDTV, respectively. The folder is named as below.
• nnnOLCV1: “nnn” is a three-digit number (from 100 to 999)

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 247


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

(g) System administrative information folders (CV)


System data such as each setting information is stored to the folders. Also, the “ExamLink.htm”
file to browse examination information using a personal computer is stored.

NOTE
• The data in the DCIM folder (except a browsing file, such as “ExamLink.htm” and)
is in conformity with the DCF standard (image format for digital cameras).
• The maximum number of examination image files recorded in a folder is 9,999. The
maximum number of examination folders in a portable memory is 900. The total
volume of image data cannot exceed the amount of memory of the portable
memory.
• The recording speed decelerates when the number of examination images in a
folder exceeds 100 or when the number of examination folders in a portable
memory exceeds 100.

Ch.7

248 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

 Playback the images using the personal computer

The endoscopic images and annotation images in the portable memory can be played back on the
personal computer.

CAUTION
Do not delete or move data in the portable memory using the personal computer.
The data may be damaged or it may not be possible to playback images from the
portable memory.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port of the personal computer.
For inserting it to the port, refer to the instruction manual for the personal computer.
2 Select the drive in which the portable memory is inserted.
3 Open the CV folder and open the STUDY folder
next.

Ch.7
Figure 7.49

4 Open the “ExamLink.htm” file (see Figure 7.49): the examination folder list is
displayed. (see Figure 7.50)

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 249


7.11 Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)

5 Open the desired examination data: the examination image list is displayed. (see
Figure 7.51)

Figure 7.50

6 Open the desired image file: the image is displayed.

Figure 7.51
Ch.7
NOTE
• Refer to the instruction manual for personal computer as well.
• If the image file is opened without using the “ExamLink.htm” file, patient data is not
displayed.
• The image and patient data cannot be displayed in the same screen on the
personal computer.
• “ExamLink.htm” file is compatible with Internet Explorer 8.0 - 11.0.

250 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.12 Remotely controlling the DVR

7.12 Remotely controlling the DVR

When remotely controlling the DVR being connected to the video system center,the DVR needs to be
set as described in Section 4.4, “System setup (connection setting)”.

 Controlling the DVR by the menu list

1 Select the “Function Operation Panel” to display the “Function Operation Panel” as
described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list”.

Figure 7.52

2 Control the DVR using menu buttons on the screen. The remote keys and their
functions are shown below.

Remote key Function


Ch.7
Perform or pause recording.
During recording to the DVR, “●” is displayed in the endoscopic
image screen.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 251


7.12 Remotely controlling the DVR

 Controlling the DVR from the custom switch


When remotely controlling the DVR from a custom switch, the DVR function needs to be
assigned to a custom switch in advance as described in Section 4.7, “User settings (switch
presets)”.

1 Press the custom switch to which the DVR function is assigned: recording the
endoscopic image starts, and the “ ” indicator is displayed on the screen.

DVR indicator

Endoscopic image

“ ” indicator

Figure 7.53

2 To pause recording temporarily, press the same custom switch to which the DVR
function is assigned while recording.

NOTE
Only the recording and pause operations can be operated from the custom switch.

Ch.7

 Controlling the DVR from the keyboard

1 Press the F6 key on the keyboard: the “DVR”


“DVR” indicator
indicator above the F6 key on the keyboard
lights up.

F6 key

Figure 7.54

252 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.12 Remotely controlling the DVR

2 Press the “F9” key on the keyboard: the status of the video recorder switches
between recording and pausing.

F9 key

Figure 7.55

CAUTION
Do not record any images while a message, “Now Loading...”, appears on the front
panel of DVO-1000MDP (about 1 minute) after turning ON the DVO-1000MDP and
right after inserting the disk. While preparing the DVO-1000MDP, images cannot be
recorded. For further details, refer to the instruction manual for the DVO-1000MDP.

NOTE
• Refer to the instruction manual for the DVR.
• When connecting the DVR using the remote terminal only the recording and pause
operations can be operated.
Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 253


7.13 Remotely controlling the video printer

7.13 Remotely controlling the video printer

The video printer connected to the video system center is remotely controlled, and it captures
endoscopic images.
The video printer needs to be set for remotely controlling in advance as described in Section 4.3,
“System setup (system)” and Section 4.4, “System setup (connection setting)”. The capturing and
release functions needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance. For details, see Section 4.7,
“User settings (switch presets)”.

 Capturing the images

1 Press the F6 key on the keyboard: the


“PRINTER” indicator
“PRINTER” indicator above the “DVR” key on
the keyboard lights up.

F11 key

F6 key

Figure 7.56

Ch.7

254 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.13 Remotely controlling the video printer

2 Press the “CAPTURE” or “RELEASE” key on the keyboard or a custom switch to


which the capture or release function is assigned as described in Section 7.11,
“Recording and playing back the frozen image (portable memory or internal buffer)”:
an endoscopic image is captured (see Figure 7.57). The CVP counter on the monitor
increments by one.

CVP counter

Figure 7.57

CAUTION
• Always delete all images in the video printer at the end of an examination when the
number of images per sheet is more than two. If not, the images of a previous
examination and a new examination may be mixed on one print sheet. For
operation, refer to the instruction manual for the video printer.
• Confirm that the necessary images have been printed before deleting the images.

NOTE Ch.7

• Refer to the instruction manual for the video printer.


• Depending on the video printer or the number of images on a print sheet, the F11
key may not be operated while printing.
• When the text information is hidden, the CVP counter is not displayed on the
screen.
• When “Check printer image” in the “Printer” tab is set to “ON”, the captured image
is displayed for 3 seconds on the monitor at capturing the endoscopic image to the
video printer.
• The differences between the “CAPTURE” and “RELEASE” keys are below.

Key Explanation Index image


RELEASE Capture the frozen image. Display the index image when the index display
is set.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 255


7.13 Remotely controlling the video printer

Key Explanation Index image


CAPTURE Capture and print the frozen image. Display the index image.
Table 7.27

Ch.7

256 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.14 Remotely controlling the monitor

7.14 Remotely controlling the monitor

 Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)

The PIP or POP display function is available when using the OEV261H. The image of external
equipment and the endoscopic image are displayed on the same monitor at the same time by
controlling the PIP or POP display function of the OEV261H.The PIP function needs to be set in
advance as described in “ “PIP/POP” tab” on page 108.
The PIP ON/OFF switch function, PIP/POP switch function, and sub-image size switch function need
to be assigned to a custom switches in advance. For details, see Section 4.7, “User settings (switch
presets)”.

PIP display POP display

Main image
Left Right
image image
Sub-
image

The images are displayed as main and sub-images. The images are displayed side by side.

Figure 7.58

 PIP

1 Press the “PIP/POP ON” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the PIP Ch.7
ON/OFF switch function is assigned: the sub-image is displayed on the monitor.

“PIP/POP MODE” key


“PIP/POP ON” key
“PIP/POP SELECT” key

Figure 7.59

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 257


7.14 Remotely controlling the monitor

2 Press the “PIP/POP SELECT” key on the keyboard or custom switch to which the
PIP/POP switch function is assigned (see Figure 7.59): each press changes the
image display from “SDI1”, “SDI2”, “DVI-COMP1”, “DVI-VIDEO2”, “RGB-VIDEO”,
“Y/C”, “VIDEO”, to “HD15” of OEV261 in rotation.
3 Press the “PIP/POP MODE” key on the keyboard or custom switch to which the mode
switch function is assigned (see Figure 7.59): each pressing changes the display as
below.

Endoscopic External
image image External
image
External Endoscopic
image image

The display location and size of the sub-image depends on the setting in the “user settings”.

Figure 7.60

4 Press the custom switch to which the sub-image size switch function is assigned:
each pressing changes the size of sub-image.
5 Press the “PIP/POP ON” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the PIP
ON/OFF switch function is assigned: the PIP display mode is canceled.

NOTE
• Press the “PIP/POP ON” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the
Ch.7 PIP/POP ON function is assigned cancels the PIP display.
• The PIP mode is different depending on the setting in the “System setup”. For
details, see “ “PIP/POP” tab” on page 108.

258 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.14 Remotely controlling the monitor

 POP

1 Press the “PIP/POP ON” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the PIP
ON/OFF switch function to assigned: the POP display is displayed on the monitor.

“PIP/POP MODE” key


“PIP/POP ON” key
“PIP/POP SELECT” key

Figure 7.61

2 Press the “PIP/POP SELECT” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the
PIP/POP switch function is assigned (see Figure 7.61). Each press changes the
image display from “SDI1”, “SDI2”, “DVI-COMP1”, “DVI-VIDEO2”, “RGB-VIDEO”,
“Y/C”, “VIDEO”, to “HD15” of OEV261 in rotation.
3 Press the “PIP/POP MODE” key on the keyboard (see Figure 7.61). Each pressing
changes the display as below.

Endoscopic External Endoscopic External Endoscopic External External


image image image image image image image Ch.7

Figure 7.62

NOTE
Press the “PIP/POP ON” key on the keyboard or the custom switch to which the
PIP/POP ON function is assigned cancels the POP display.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 259


7.14 Remotely controlling the monitor

 Image source of the monitor

The images displayed on the monitor are changed by remotely changing the image source of the
monitor. The “OEV output” needs to be assigned to a custom switch in advance as described in
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the custom switch to which the “OEV output” function is assigned: the output on
the monitor changes as shown in Table 7.28.

Monitor Explanation
OEV261H SDI1 SDI2 DVI-COMP1 DVI-VIDEO2 RGB-VIDEO Y/C VIDEO 
HD15

Table 7.28

NOTE
The OEV output cannot be changed in PIP or POP mode.

Ch.7

260 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.14 Remotely controlling the monitor

 FLIP function

The display on the monitor is changed by remotely controlling the FLIP function of the OEV261H. The
display is changed as shown in Figure 7.63 below. The “OEV-FLIP” function needs to be assigned to a
custom switch for remotely controlling the FLIP function on the OEV261H in advance as described in
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Press the custom switch to which the “OEV-FLIP” function is assigned: the display on
the monitor is changed as shown in Figure 7.63.

Normal image Rotated image Mirror-reversed image

Figure 7.63

NOTE
• When the PIP or POP function on the OEV261H is active, the FLIP function is
disabled.
• While the orientation function is activated, the FLIP function cannot be changed.
Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 261


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient


data

Up to 50 patient data to be displayed on the screen is entered in advance.

 Displaying the “Select patient” screen

1 Select the “Patient data” as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu
list”: the “Select patient” screen is displayed.

Figure 7.64

2 Select any operation in Table 7.29 with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
Ch.7 the keyboard or front panel. Perform the following operations as described in
Figure 7.29.

Button Function
End (Menu) Return to the endoscopic live image.
Return (Esc) Return to the menu list.
Select (S) Calls the registered patient data.
 See “ Calling patient data” on page 267.
Edit (E) Edit patient data.
 See “ New registering and editing patient data” on page 263.

Table 7.29

262 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

 New registering and editing patient data

Patient data is registered newly and edited.

1 Display the “Select patient” screen as described in “ Displaying the “Select patient”
screen” on page 262. (See Figure 7.65)
2 Select “Edit (E)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 7.65) and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard: the “Select patient > Edit” screen is displayed (see Figure 7.66).

Figure 7.65

3 Select the “Entry (E)” and the patient ID to be edited on the screen with the arrow
keys (see Figure 7.66) and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the “Select patient
> Edit > Input” screen is displayed (see Figure 7.67).

Ch.7

Figure 7.66

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 263


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

4 Select each text box with the arrow keys on the keyboard, enter patient data, or edit
the registered information.

Figure 7.67

Patient data Data input


ID No. Alphanumeric characters in single-width and up to 15 characters.
Name Alphanumeric characters in single-width and up to 20 characters.
D.O.B. 8 characters. The date can be entered from “01/01/1868” to
current date.
Sex Alphanumeric characters in single-width or ideogram. Up to
1 character.
Age Alphanumeric characters in single-width and ideogram.
Up to 3 characters.
Automatically calculated after entering D.O.B.
Ch.7 Table 7.30

NOTE
Information can be saved even if only the necessary items are filled in.

5 Select the “End (Menu)” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: a confirmation
message box appears.
6 Select the “Save” and “Enter” key on the keyboard: the entered data affects and the
endoscopic image screen is displayed.

264 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

NOTE
• When selecting the “Delete” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard, the data is
deleted, and the endoscopic image screen is displayed.
• To cancel and stop the input operation, select the “Return (Esc)” and press the
“Enter” key on the keyboard. A confirmation message box is displayed and select
“Delete (D)”: the data is cancelled, and the “Select patient > Edit” screen is
displayed.
• When the error message appears, confirm if the entered data is correct.
• When entering patient data during the endoscopic examination, see Section 6.6,
“Recall of user settings data”.

 Deleting patient data

1 Display the “Select patient” screen as described in “ Displaying the “Select patient”
screen” on page 262. (See Table 7.68)
2 Select “Edit (E)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 7.68) and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard: the “Select patient > Edit” screen is displayed (see Figure 7.69).

Ch.7

Figure 7.68

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 265


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

3 Select the “Delete (Del)” and the patient ID to be deleted from the list on the screen
with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the patient ID to be
deleted is selected. When deleting several patient IDs, select them as well. Select
“Execute (R)” and press the “Enter” key. A confirmation message box appears.

Figure 7.69

NOTE
Selecting the “ALL” deletes all patient data.

4 Select the “Yes” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the selected patient data
is deleted, and a message, “(No Data)”, appears.

NOTE
Selecting “No” and pressing the “Enter” key on the keyboard cancel the deletion
operation.
Ch.7

5 When deleting other patient data, repeat Steps 3 and 4.


6 Select the “End (Menu)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the
keyboard: the endoscopic image is displayed.

266 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

 Calling patient data

This operation calls the registered patient data and displays it in the endoscopic image display.

1 Display the “Select patient” screen as described in “ Displaying the “Select patient”
screen” on page 262. (See Table 7.70)
2 Select the “Select (S)” and patient ID to be called with the arrow keys and press the
“Enter” key on the keyboard: the selected patient data is called, and the endoscopic
image is displayed.

Figure 7.70

3 Confirm that the selected patient data is displayed in the endoscopic image display.

NOTE
When calling registed patient data, starting its examination,and finishing the
Ch.7
examination by pressing the “EXAM” key, the patient name that has finished the
examination turns gray in the “Select patient” screen.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 267


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

 Saving patient data to the portable memory

This operation saves new registrations and edited patient data to the portable memory.
Patient data can be transferred to other OTV-S190 using the portable memory that the patient data
saved in.

NOTE
Confirm that there are no necessary patient data in the portable memory. All patient
data will be overwritten with the patient data in the video system center, and they
cannot be restored.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port in advance. For further
details, refer to “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on
page 225.
2 Select the “Edit (E)” on the “Select patient” screen with the arrow keys (see
Figure 7.71) and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the “Select patient > Edit”
screen displayed (see Figure 7.72).

Ch.7

Figure 7.71

268 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

3 Select the “Save/Load (S)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 7.72) and press the
“Enter” key on the keyboard: the “Select patient > Edit > Save/Load” screen is
displayed (see Figure 7.73).

Figure 7.72

4 Select the “Save (S)” and patient ID to be saved with the arrow keys on the keyboard
and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the patient ID is selected.

Ch.7

Figure 7.73

NOTE
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all patient IDs.
• Pressing the “Enter” key again while selecting patient data cancels the selection.

5 When another patient ID is saved, select it in the same way as the above.
6 Select the “Run (R)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard
after selecting the patient ID to be saved: the “Sel. patient > Edit > Save > Save to”
screen is displayed (see Figure 7.74).

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 269


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

7 Select the “Save (S)” and a box on the patient ID list and press the “Enter” key on the
keyboard: the box is selected.

Figure 7.74

NOTE
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all patient IDs.
• Pressing the “Enter” key again while selecting patient data cancels the selection.

8 When saving several patient IDs, select them as well.

NOTE
• The saving destinations need to be selected the same numbers of the patient IDs
selected in the “Select patient > Edit > Save/Load” screen.
• The number of the saving destinations and the number of the user IDs are
Ch.7 displayed in the screen. (See Figure 7.74)

9 Select “Run (R)” on the screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard when
selecting as many saving destinations as patient IDs to be saved: a confirmation
massage box appears.
10 Select the “Yes” on the box with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the
keyboard: patient data is saved to the portable memory, and the “Select patient > Edit”
screen is displayed.

NOTE
When selecting the “No” on the box and pressing the “Enter” key on the keyboard,
patient data is not saved to the portable memory, and the “Sel. patient > Edit >
Save > Save to” screen is displayed.

270 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

11 Select the “End (Menu)” on the screen with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key
on the keyboard: the endoscopic image is displayed.

NOTE
Selecting the “Return (Esc)” on the screen with the arrow keys and pressing the
“Enter” key on the keyboard return to the previous screen.

 Loading patient data from portable memory

Patient data saved in the portable memory is loaded.

CAUTION
Confirm that there are no necessary patient data in the video system center. All
patient data will be overwritten with the patient data in the video system center, and
they cannot be restored.

1 Insert the portable memory into the portable memory port in advance. For further
details, refer to “ Inserting the portable memory into the portable memory port” on
page 225.
2 Select the “Edit (E)” on the “Select patient” screen with the arrow keys (see
Figure 7.75) and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the “Select patient > Edit”
screen displayed (see Figure 7.76).

Ch.7

Figure 7.75

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 271


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

3 Select the “Save/Load (S)” with the arrow keys (see Figure 7.76) and press the
“Enter” key on the keyboard: the “Select patient > Edit > Save/Load” screen is
displayed (see Figure 7.77).

Figure 7.76

4 Select “Load (L)” with the arrow keys: the patient ID list saved in the portable memory
is displayed.
5 Select the patient ID to be loaded with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on
the keyboard: the patient ID is selected.
The patient ID list is changed to the one in the portable memory.

Ch.7

Figure 7.77

6 Select patient ID to be loaded with the arrow keys (see Figure 7.77) and press the
“Enter” key on the keyboard: the patient ID is selected.

NOTE
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all patient IDs.
• Pressing the “Enter” key again while selecting patient data cancels the selection.

272 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.15 Presetting, calling, saving, and loading patient data

7 When another patient ID is loaded, select it in the same way as the above.
8 Select the “Run (R)” with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard
after selecting the patient ID to be loaded: the “Sel. patient > Edit > Load > Load to”
screen is displayed (See Figure 7.78).
9 Select the “Load (L)” and patient data on the patient ID list and press the “Enter” key
on the keyboard: the data is selected.

Figure 7.78

NOTE
• Selecting the “ALL” selects all patient IDs.
• Pressing the “Enter” key again while selecting patient data cancels the selection.

10 When saving several patient IDs, select them as well.

NOTE Ch.7

• The loading destinations need to be selected the same numbers of the patient IDs
selected in the “Select patient > Edit > Save/Load” screen.
• The number of the saving destinations and the number of the user IDs are
displayed in the screen. (See Figure 7.78)

11 Select “Run (R)” on the screen and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard when
selecting the loading destinations more than patient IDs to be loaded: a confirmation
message box appears.
12 Select the “Yes (Y)” on the box with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key on the
keyboard: patient data is loaded from the portable memory, and the “Select patient >
Edit” screen is displayed.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 273


7.16 Other functions

NOTE
When selecting the “No (N)” on the box and pressing the “Enter” key on the
keyboard, patient data is not loaded from the portable memory, and the “Sel.
patient > Edit > Load > Load to” screen is displayed.

13 Select the “End (Menu)” on the screen with the arrow keys and press the “Enter” key
on the keyboard: the endoscopic image is displayed.

NOTE
Selecting the “Return (Esc)” on the screen with the arrow keys and pressing the
“Enter” key on the keyboard return to the previous screen.

7.16 Other functions

 Assigning functions to the custom switches

The custom switches can be assigned various functions. For details of functions and settings, see
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch presets)”.

Custom button
CUSTOM 1 and 2 buttons on the front panel

Ch.7 CUSTOM A, B, C, and D buttons on the keyboard


Remote switches 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the endoscope
Foot switches 1, 2, 3, and 4 connected to the OTV and light source.

Table 7.31

NOTE
• The number of remote switches is different depending on the endoscopes.
• When the video system center is used with the CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro, or
CLV-180, functions can be assigned to two foot switches connected to the video
system center and light source respectively. Foot switch “1” and “2” displayed in the
custom switch information window indicate functions assigned to the foot switches
connected to the video system center, and foot switch “3” and “4” displayed in the
custom switch information window indicate functions assigned to the foot switches
connected to the light source.

274 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.16 Other functions

 Locking the keyboard

This operation locks the key input of the keyboard.

Press the “Shift” and F5 keys together: the key lock indicator lights up, and the key
input is locked.

F5 key “KEY LOCK” lamp

“Shift” key “Shift” key

Figure 7.79

NOTE
To unlock the keys, press the “Shift” and F5 keys together again.

Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 275


7.16 Other functions

 Reset

Each setting of the video system center is reset as shown in Table 7.32. The settings of keyboard,
system setup, registered patient data, and white balance keep the setting values set before reset.

Function Setting
Monitor display Endoscopic image
Observation mode Normal light observation mode
(PDD White mode in the PDD mode)
Index image display OFF
Freeze OFF
Endoscopic image size Setting value of the user setup
Electronic zoom mode Mode 1 (zoom ratio is “× 1.0”)
Color tone adjustment (R,B,C) Setting value of the user setup WLI/NBI/PDD
observation mode
AGC Setting value of the User setup Normal light
observation mode
NBI color mode Depending on an endoscope connected to the video
system center.
Brightness Depending on settings of the light source connected to
the video system center.
Text information on the monitor Full display
Arrow pointer Hide
Cursor Display
Locking the printer remote Unlock
Locking the keyboard Unlock
User settings data The current user setting value is affected.
Ch.7
Table 7.32

Press the “Reset” button on the front panel for more than 1 second.
The setup of the video system center is set as shown in Table 7.32.

Reset button

Figure 7.80

276 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.16 Other functions

 Displaying the color bar and the 50% white screen

This operation displays the “Color bar” and “50% white” screens used for color adjustment of the
monitor.

1 Select either “Color bar” or “50% white” as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation
of the menu list” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the “Color bar” or “50%
white” screen is displayed.

Color bar 50% white screen

Figure 7.81

2 Confirm that all colors of the color chart are displayed properly. If the colors do not
appear properly, adjust them according to the instruction manual for the monitor.
3 Press the “Esc” key on the keyboard. The menu list is displayed.

Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 277


7.16 Other functions

 Selecting the mode of character input from the keyboard

Set the mode of entering text on the endoscopic image display and setting screens.
The mode is indicated on the “Caps lock indicator” on the keyboard.

Caps lock indicator

Figure 7.82

Key Explanation
“CAPS LOCK” Switches between the capital letter and the small letter mode.When the “CAPS
LOCK” is active, the caps lock indicator lights up.
“INS” Switches the character input mode on the cursor position between insert and
overwrite. When the insert function is active, the cursor on the screen is displayed as
“I” and the input character is inserted in the cursor position. When the overwrite input
function is active, the cursor is displayed as “” and the input character overwrites
the existing character at the cursor position.

Table 7.33
Ch.7

278 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.16 Other functions

 Confirming and editing data of the endoscope

The memory chip stores data of the endoscope, and the data can be displayed on the monitor. Also,
data about the endoscope can be entered and edited.

NOTE
The memory chip is built with durability but may still be damaged. If a memory chip
is damaged, it becomes incapable of backing up data. In this case, contact
Olympus.

1 Select the “Scope information” as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the
menu list”: the “Scope information” screen is displayed. (See Figure 7.83)
2 Select the tab with the arrow keys on the keyboard and display the items to be
confirmed and edited.
The data items of the endoscope are shown in Table 7.34.

㻿㼏㼛㼜㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑㼘䚷䚷䚷

㻞㻝㻜㻝㻞㻟㻠㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌

Ch.7

Figure 7.83

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 279


7.16 Other functions

Tab Data item Explanation Input


Device data Scope model Display the model name of the endoscope. No
Supported observation Display the corresponding observation mode.
No
modes
Serial number Display the serial number of the endoscope. No
Maint. Data Cumulative uses Display the number of turning ON the video
No
system center.
Checkup period Display the number of inspections. 0 – 4095
Cumulative time Display the accumulation of usage time. No
Service Contract Display a service contract. No
Warranty period Display the warranty expiration date of the
No
endoscope.
Equip. data Customer name Enter the facilities using endoscopes. Up to 40 characters.
Comment Enter the comments on the endoscope. Up to 40 characters.
Customer ID Enter the management No. of the endoscope. Up to 20 characters.

Table 7.34

3 When there is an item to be changed in the “Equip. data” tab, select a text box to be
changed and enter data by the keyboard.
4 After data is entered, press the “End (Menu)” on the screen and press the “Enter” key
on the keyboard: a confirmation message box appears.
5 Select the “Save” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: the edited information is
saved, and the endoscopic image is displayed.

CAUTION
Ch.7
Do not turn the video system center OFF or disconnect the endoscope from the
video system center before the endoscopic image display reappears. Otherwise,
inputting data in the memory chip might not be completed, and the data may be
destroyed.

NOTE
• After a confirmation message box is displayed as described in Step 4, selecting
“Delete (D)” on the screen cancels changes and returns to the endoscopic image
display.
• Selecting the “Return (R)” saves the edited data as well as selecting the “End
(Menu)”. However, after saving, the menu list is displayed instead of the
endoscopic image

280 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.16 Other functions

 System reset

The internal buffer of the video system center is reset to the default setting. All images in the internal
buffer are deleted.

CAUTION
• When resetting the internal buffer, all images are deleted. They cannot be restored.
• Do not turn the video system center OFF while resetting all. Damage to the video
system center may result.

1 Select the “All reset” as described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list”: a
confirmation message box is displayed.
2 Select the “Yes” and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard: all images in the internal
buffer of video system center are deleted, and the internal buffer is reset to the default
setting.

NOTE
When resetting is cancelled, select the “No” while a confirmation message box is
displayed. The menu list is displayed.

Ch.7

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 281


7.17 Operation without the keyboard

7.17 Operation without the keyboard

When the keyboard is not connected, each function of the video system center can be activated
according to the following operations.

NOTE
When the keyboard is connected, the following operations are unavailable. Operate
the video system center using the keyboard as described in other sections.

 Operation by the “Function Operation Panel” menu

1 Select the “Function operation panel” to display the “Function operation panel” as
described in Section 7.1, “Basic operation of the menu list” on page 187.

Ch.7
Figure 7.84

2 Select a desired setting menu from the menu list shown in the Table 7.35 with the
arrow keys on the front panel and press the “Enter” key to operate.

282 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


7.17 Operation without the keyboard

Menu Explanation Reference


WLI The observation mode is set to the See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on
WLI observation mode. page 215.
NBI The observation mode is set to the See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on
NBI observation mode. page 215.
PDD1 The observation mode is set to the See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on
PDD1 observation mode. page 215.
PDD2 The observation mode is set to the See Section 7.9, “Changing the observation mode” on
PDD2 observation mode. page 215.
/ Record the images to the DVR and See Section 7.12, “Remotely controlling the DVR” on
pause the DVR. page 251.
PIP Change the PIP display mode. See “ Two screens display (PIP and POP displays)” on
page 257.
Monitor output Change the monitor output. See “ Image source of the monitor” on page 260.
Iris Change the iris mode. See “ Iris mode” on page 190.
Enhance Change the image enhancement See “ Image enhancement” on page 198.
mode.
Image size Change the endoscopic image size. See “ Image size” on page 205.
Zoom Change the zoom ratio of the See “ Electronic zoom function” on page 203.
endoscopic image.
AGC Switch the AGC function ON or OFF. See “ Automatic gain control (AGC)” on page 197.
Cursor Switch the cursor to be displayed or See “ Cursor” on page 208.
hidden.
Switch info Display the custom switch See “ Assigning functions to the custom switches” on
information. page 274.
Arrow pointer Switch the arrow pointer to be See “ Arrow pointer” on page 211.
displayed or hidden.
Add data Press to change the clearing See “ Clearing characters from the screen” on Ch.7
character mode in the endoscopic page 206.
image display.
Exam Press at the start and end of the See Section 6.9, “Termination of the operation” on
examination. page 186.

Table 7.35

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 283


7.17 Operation without the keyboard

 Character input by the software keyboard

1 The software keyboard is displayed when entering the character in each setting
without connecting the keyboard.

Text box

㻵㻺㻿㻱㻾㼀 㻯㻭㻼㻿
㻝 㻞 㻟 㻠 㻡 㻢 㻣 㻤 㻥 㻜 Input button
㼍 㼎 㼏 㼐 㼑 㼒 㼓 㼔 㼕 㼖
㼗 㼘 㼙 㼚 㼛 㼜 㼝 㼞 㼟 㼠

㼡 㼢 㼣 㼤 㼥 㼦 㼟㼜
㻘 㻚 㻧 㻦 㻍 㻫 㻬 㼪 㼊 㼋
㻛 㻖 㻗 㻙 㻩 㻑 㻏 㻒 㻐 㼨 Cancel
㻨 㻪 㻔 㻕 㼧 㼩 㼇 㼉 䇺 䇾
End
㻮㻿 㻰㻱㻸 䊹 䊻

㻱㼚㼐 㻯㼍㼚㼟㼑㼘

㻌㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㻔䊺䊼䊹䊻㻕㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌㻌 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㻔㻱㼚㼠㼑㼞㻕

Figure 7.85

2 Select any input buttons on the software keyboard with the arrow keys on the front
panel and press the “Enter” button to enter characters: the entered characters are
displayed in the text box.
3 Select the “End” on the software keyboard with the arrow keys and press the “Enter”
key on the front panel after completing character input: the character data is changed
to the entered character data, and the software keyboard is disappeared.
Ch.7

NOTE
• When selecting the “Cancel” on the software with the arrow keys and pressing the
“Enter” button on the front panel, the entered character data is canceled, and the
software keyboard disappears.
• While displaying the software keyboard, do not operate keys or buttons other than
the arrow keys and the “Enter” button.

284 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


8.1 Care

Chapter 8 Care, Storage, and Disposal

8.1 Care

WARNING
• After wiping with a piece of moistened gauze, dry the video system center
thoroughly before using it again. If it is used while still wet, there is the risk of an
electric shock.
• When cleaning the video system center, always wear appropriate personal
protection equipment such as eye wear, face mask, moisture-resistant clothing,
and chemical-resistant gloves that fit properly and are long enough to that your skin
is not exposed. Blood, mucus, and other potentially infectious material adhering to
the video system center could pose an infection control risk.
• Do not apply spray-type medical agents such as rubbing alcohol directly to the
video system center. Medical agents may enter the video system center through
the ventilation grills and may cause equipment damage.

CAUTION
• Do not clean the video connector socket, the terminals, and the AC mains power
inlet. Cleaning them can deform or corrode the contacts, which could damage the
video system center.
• When the video connector socket is soiled with debris, thoroughly wipe off all debris
and dry it completely. Otherwise, cross-contamination may result.
• Do not soak in water, autoclave, or gas sterilize the video system center. These
methods will damage it. Ch.8
• Do not wipe the external surface with hard or abrasive wiping material. The surface
will be scratched.

After using the video system center, immediately perform the following cleaning procedures. If cleaning
is delayed, residual organic debris will begin to solidify, and it may be difficult to effectively clean the
video system center. Always remove debris routinely.

1 Turn the video system center OFF and disconnect the power cord from the wall mains
outlet.
2 When the video system center is soiled with blood or other potentially infectious
materials, wipe off all debris using a piece of gauze moistened with neutral detergent.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 285


8.2 Storage

3 Remove dust, dirt, and other stains on the surface by wiping with a piece of gauze
moistened with 70% ethyl or isopropyl alcohol.
4 Make sure to dry the video system center after wiping with 70% ethyl or isopropyl
alcohol.

8.2 Storage

CAUTION
Do not store the video system center in a location exposed to direct sunlight,
X-rays, radio activity or strong electromagnetic radiation (e.g., near microwave
medical treatment equipment, short-wave medical treatment equipment, MRI, radio
equipment, or cellular phones). Damage to the video system center may result.

1 Turn the video system center OFF and disconnect the power cord from the wall mains
outlet.
2 Disconnect the ancillary equipment connected to the video system center.
3 Store the equipment in the level position in a clean, dry, and stable location.

8.3 Disposal

CAUTION
When disposing of this instrument or any of its components (such as fuses), follow
Ch.8
all applicable national and local laws and guidelines.

1 For security reasons, clear all data in the video system center.
For details, see “ System reset” on page 281.
2 Clear the image data and patient data in the portable memory, or format the portable
memory. For details, see “ Formatting the portable memory” on page 227.

286 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.1 Troubleshooting

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting

9.1 Troubleshooting

If any irregularity is observed during inspecting as described in Chapter 5, “Inspection” or using as


described in Chapter 6, “Operation”, do not use the video system center and solve the problem as
described in Section 9.2, “Troubleshooting guide”. If the problem still cannot be resolved, contact
Olympus.

WARNING
Never use the video system center if an irregularity is observed. Damage or
irregularity of the video system center may result in equipment damage, an electric
shock, and/or burns.

NOTE
If an accessory of the instrument needs to be replaced, contact Olympus to
purchase a replacement.

Ch.9

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 287


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

9.2 Troubleshooting guide

The following table shows the possible causes of and countermeasures against troubles that may
occur due to equipment setting errors or deterioration of consumable.
When troubles or failures other than those listed in the following table are observed, turn OFF the video
system center once and turn it ON again. If the problem still cannot be resolved, return the video
system center for repair as described in Section 9.3, “Returning the video system center for repair”.

Irregularity description Possible cause Solution


The endoscope cannot be The endoscope is not compatible with Use one of the endoscopes shown in
connected to the video the video system center. the “ System chart” on page 303.
system center.
The power fails to come on. The video system center is OFF. Turn the video system center ON.
The power cord is not connected Connect to a wall mains outlet as
correctly. described in Section 3.10, “Connection
to the AC mains power supply”.
The mobile workstation is OFF. Turn the mobile workstation ON.
The endoscopic image does The monitor is OFF. Turn the monitor ON as described in the
not appear on the monitor. monitor’s instruction manual.
The endoscope, or camera head is not Connect the endoscope or camera
connected correctly. head is as described in its instruction
manual. (See also Section 6.3,
“Connection of an endoscope”.)
The monitor cable is not connected Connect the monitor cable as described
correctly. in Section 3.5, “Connection of the
monitor”.
A setting screen is displayed. Press the “MENU” key on the keyboard
or “Menu“ button on the front panel to
display the endoscopic image screen.
The color bar image has been Press the “Esc” key on the keyboard or
displayed. "Menu" button on the front panel to
restore the endoscopic image.
The output setting of the monitor is Set it correctly as described in the
incorrect. monitor’s instruction manual.
Ch.9 The brightness setting of the monitor is Set a proper brightness as described in
improper. the monitor’s instruction manual.
The synchronized signal setting of the Set a proper signal as described in the
monitor is improper. monitor’s instruction manual.
Foreign objects, such as detergent Wipe the electrical contacts on the
remnants, hard water residue, finger endoscope connector using clean lint-
grease, dust, and lint, are on the free cloths moistened with 70% ethyl or
electrical contacts. 70% isopropyl alcohol and completely
dry them. After drying them, connect
the endoscope to the light source.

288 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Irregularity description Possible cause Solution


The endoscopic image is too The light source cable is not connected Connect the light source cable correctly
dark or too bright. correctly. as described in Section 3.4,
“Connection of the light source”.
The brightness setting of the monitor is Set a proper brightness as described in
improper. the monitor’s instruction manual.
The contrast setting of the monitor is Set a proper contrast as described in
improper. the monitor’s instruction manual.
The iris mode selection is incorrect. Set it properly as described in “ Iris
mode” on page 190.
The exposure setting is incorrect. Set it properly as described in
“ Brightness” on page 191.
The light source has a problem such as Solve the problem as described in the
the lamp is not ignited. light source’s instruction manual.
The white balance cannot be A white object is not monitored. Adjust the white balance properly as
adjusted. described in Section 6.5, “White
balance adjustment”.
The brightness of the monitor is Adjust the white balance properly as
improper. described in Section 6.5, “White
balance adjustment”.
The color bar remains The endoscope is not connected. The color bar is displayed when turning
displayed. ON the video system center without
connecting the endoscope.
The endoscope is not connected Connect the endoscope as described in
correctly. Section 6.3, “Connection of an
endoscope”.

Ch.9

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 289


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Irregularity description Possible cause Solution


The color tone of the The color tone is set improperly. Set it properly as described in
endoscopic image is Section 7.5, “Color tone adjustment”.
unusual. The color mode is set improperly. Set it properly as described in
“ “Color/Bright.” tab” on page 112.
The video signal format to the HDTV Set it properly as described in
monitor is set improperly. “ “Output format” tab” on page 84.
The white balance is incorrect. Adjust it properly as described in
Section 6.5, “White balance
adjustment”.
The observation mode is the Set it to the WLI observation mode as
optical-digital observation mode. described in the instruction manual for
the light source or Section 7.9,
“Changing the observation mode”.
The monitor cable is connected Connect the monitor cable properly as
incorrectly. described in Section 3.5, “Connection
of the monitor”.
A wire in the monitor cable is Replace the monitor cable with new
disconnected. one.
The PHASE setting of the monitor is Set a proper PHASE setting as
improper. described in the instruction manual for
the monitor.
The CHROMA setting of the monitor is Set a proper CHROMA setting as
improper. described in the instruction manual for
the monitor.
The color temperature setting of the Set a correct color temperature as
monitor is improper. described in the instruction manual for
the monitor.
The endoscopic image The endoscopic image is frozen. Restore the live image as described in
remains frozen. “ Freeze” on page 204.
The endoscopic image is The monitor cable is connected Connect the monitor cable correctly as
drifting. incorrectly. described in Section 3.5, “Connection
of the monitor”.
The monitor is set incorrectly. Set the monitor properly as described in
the instruction manual for the monitor.
A part of an image is not The aspect ratio of the video system Set it properly.
displayed, or an image is center to monitor is not set properly.
Ch.9
displayed in a small size.
The endoscopic image is There is a strong magnetic field near Move the source of the magnetic field
vibrating. the monitor. away from the monitor.

290 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Irregularity description Possible cause Solution


Characters do not appear on The screen is in “All clear mode”. Display characters as described in
the screen. “ Clearing characters from the screen”
on page 206.
The color bar image is displayed. Press the “Esc” keys on the keyboard
or “Menu“button on the front panel to
display the endoscopic image.
PIP display is ON. Display the endoscopic image screen
as described in “ Two screens display
(PIP and POP displays)” on page 257.
Patient data cannot be The keyboard is not connected Connect the keyboard securely as
entered. securely. described in Section 3.6, “Connection
of the keyboard”.
The keyboard keys are locked. Unlock the keys as described in
“ Locking the keyboard” on page 275.
The release destination The ancillary equipment settings are Set the ancillary equipment correctly as
device cannot be selected. incorrect. described in its instruction manual.
Recording and playback of The cable is not connected correctly. Connect the cable properly as
the DVR cannot be described in Section 3.7, “Connection
performed. of the video recorder (DVR)”.
The DVR remote control setup is Set it correctly as described in
incorrect. “ Connection setting” on page 88.
The output setting of the monitor is Set it properly as described in the
incorrect. monitor’s instruction manual.
The brightness setting of the monitor is Set a proper brightness as described in
improper. the monitor’s instruction manual.
The monitor remote cable is not Connect the monitor remote cable as
connected to the monitor. described in Section 3.5, “Connection
of the monitor”.
The monitor remote control setting is Set it properly as described in
incorrect. Section 3.5, “Connection of the
monitor”.
Image capturing and display The cable is not connected correctly. Connect the remote cable properly as
with the video printer cannot described in Section 3.8, “Connection
be performed. of the video printer”.
The printer setup in the system setup is Set it properly as described in
incorrect. Section 4.4, “System setup (connection
Ch.9
setting)”.
The output setting of the monitor is Set it correctly as described in the
incorrect. monitor’s instruction manual.
The brightness setting of the monitor is Set a proper brightness as described in
improper. the monitor’s instruction manual.
The remote cable is not connected to Connect the monitor remote cable as
the monitor. described in Section 3.5, “Connection
of the monitor”.
The monitor remote control setting is Set it correctly as described in
incorrect. “Monitor”.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 291


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Irregularity description Possible cause Solution


The image cannot be stored The portable memory is not inserted Insert the portable memory properly.
to the portable memory. into the portable memory port of the
video system center properly.
Available space of the portable memory Delete unnecessary images or use a
is low. new portable memory.
The image stored to the The portable memory is not inserted Insert the portable memory properly.
portable memory cannot be into the portable memory port of the
played back. video system center properly.
The image was edited on a personal The image cannot be played back.
computer or another equipment.
The endoscope’s remote The endoscope is not connected Connect the endoscope as described in
switches are inoperative. correctly. Section 6.3, “Connection of an
endoscope”.
The user settings for the endoscope’s Set it properly as described in
remote switches is incorrect. Section 4.7, “User settings (switch
presets)”.
The foot switches are The foot switches are not connected Connect the foot switches as described
inoperative. correctly. in Section 3.9, “Connection of the foot
switch”.
The foot switch setting is improper. Set it properly as described in
Section 4.7, “User settings (switch
presets)”.
The internal clock shows the The internal clock is not set correctly. Set it properly as described in
wrong time and/or data. “ “Date/comment” tab” on page 80.
The endoscope information The endoscope is not connected Connect the endoscope as described in
window is not displayed. correctly. the instruction manual for the
endoscope or Section 6.3, “Connection
of an endoscope”.
The endoscope not having the Connect the endoscope having the
endoscope information function is endoscope information function as
connected. described in the instruction manual for
the endoscope.
The endoscope information The endoscope is not connected Connect the endoscope as described in
data cannot be entered. correctly. the instruction manual for the
endoscope or Section 6.3, “Connection
of an endoscope”.
Ch.9 The endoscope not having the Connect the endoscope having the
endoscope information function is endoscope information function as
connected. described in the instruction manual for
the endoscope.

292 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Irregularity description Possible cause Solution


The NBI observation is not The light source does not have the NBI Use the light source having the NBI
enabled. function. function.
An endoscope incompatible with NBI is Use the endoscope compatible with
connected. NBI.
The light source is OFF. Turn the light source ON.
The NBI mode is not selected. Select the NBI mode.
The light source cable is not connected Connect the light source cable properly
properly. as described in Section 3.4,
“Connection of the light source”.
The endoscopic image of the AGC is set to OFF. Set AGC to ON as described in
NBI observation is too dark. “ Automatic gain control (AGC)” on
page 197.
The brightness adjustment is improper. Adjust the brightness properly as
described in “ Brightness” on
page 191.
A noise may be observed in AGC is strong in the endoscopic image. In the NBI mode, AGC is ON by default.
the endoscopic image of the Therefore, when a distant place is
NBI observation. observed and the brightness of the
endoscopic image is dark, AGC is
strong and noise may be observed in
the endoscopic image. In this case, the
noise can be reduced by approaching
membrane and making the endoscopic
image bright. If the noise cannot be
reduced by approaching mucosa, the
slightest irregularity is observed on the
video system center or the endoscope.
In this case, contact Olympus.
The PDD observation is not The light source does not have the PDD Use the light source having the PDD
enabled. function. function.
An endoscope incompatible with PDD is Use the endoscope compatible with
connected. PDD.
The light source is OFF. Turn the light source ON.
The PDD mode is not selected. Select the PDD mode.
The light source cable is not connected Connect the light source cable properly
properly. as described in Section 3.5,
“Connection of the monitor”.
Ch.9

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 293


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

 Error messages
When the error messages other than in the following table are displayed,turn the OTV-S190
OFF and turn it ON again.If this does not rectify the error,turn the OTV-S190 OFF and contact
Olympus.

Code Error message Possible cause Solution


E100 CLV malfunction The light source has broken Immediately turn OFF the light source,
A87 Contact Olympus. down. unplug the power cord from the wall
mains outlet and the AC power inlet on
the light source, then contact Olympus.
E101 CLV temperature ERR The temperature inside of the Immediately turn OFF the light source
A82 Confirm ventilation grills. light source has increased, and turn it ON again after a while.
and the safety mechanism is If the same problem is occurred after
working. turning ON the light source again,
immediately turn it OFF, unplug the
power cord from the wall mains outlet
and the AC power inlet on the light
source, then contact Olympus.
E102 CLV lamp ERR The light source has broken Immediately turn OFF the light source
A84 Please check examination lamp. down. and inspect the lamp as described in
the instruction manual for the light
source.
If no irregularity is observed on the
lamp, immediately turn OFF the light
source, unplug the power cord from the
wall mains outlet and the AC power
inlet on the light source, then contact
Olympus.
E103 CLV lamp ERR The light source has broken Immediately turn OFF the light source
A83 Please check examination lamp. down. and inspect the lamp as described in
the instruction manual for the light
source.
If no irregularity is observed on the
lamp, immediately turn OFF the light
source, unplug the power cord from the
wall mains outlet and the AC power
Ch.9 inlet on the light source, then contact
Olympus.

294 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Code Error message Possible cause Solution


E104 Fog free function ERR E104 Foreign objects, such as Wipe the electrical contacts on the
Contact Olympus. detergent remnants, hard endoscope connector using clean lint-
water residue, finger grease, free cloths moistened with 70% ethyl or
dust, and lint, are on the 70% isopropyl alcohol and completely
electrical contacts. dry them. After drying them, connect
the endoscope to the light source.
If the error message appears again,
contact Olympus.
The endoscope or the video Stop using the endoscope and contact
system center is damaged. Olympus.
E200 CLV turret ERR The light source has broken Immediately turn OFF the light source,
A79 Contact Olympus. down. unplug the power cord from the wall
mains outlet and the AC power inlet on
the light source, then contact Olympus.
E201 CLV filter ERR E201 The light source has broken Immediately turn OFF the light source,
Contact Olympus. down. unplug the power cord from the wall
mains outlet and the AC power inlet on
the light source, then contact Olympus.
E205 Focus function ERR The focus function of the Stop using the endoscope and
Contact Olympus. endoscope does not work. withdraw it from the patient as
described in the instruction manual for
the endoscope. Also, contact Olympus.
E206 Focus function ERR The focus function of the Stop using the endoscope and
Contact Olympus. endoscope does not work. withdraw it from the patient as
described in the instruction manual for
the endoscope. Also, contact Olympus.
E207 CLV emergency ERR The emergency lamp is blown Immediately turn OFF the light source,
A85 Contact Olympus. or failed. unplug the power cord from the wall
mains outlet and the AC power inlet on
the light source, then contact Olympus.
E210 Internal buffer encode ERR The circuits around the Stop using the video system center and
Contact Olympus. internal buffer is damaged. contact Olympus.
E211 Internal buffer write ERR The circuits around the Stop using the video system center and
Contact Olympus. internal buffer is damaged. contact Olympus.
E214 Internal buffer ERR The circuits around the Stop using the video system center and
Contact Olympus. internal buffer is damaged. contact Olympus. Ch.9
E215 Internal buffer read ERR The circuits around the Stop using the video system center and
A12 Contact Olympus. internal buffer is damaged. contact Olympus.
A47-
A52
A73
A99
B00
B05
B06

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 295


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Code Error message Possible cause Solution


E216 Scope communication ERR Foreign objects, such as Wipe the electrical contacts on the
Contact Olympus. detergent remnants, hard endoscope connector using clean lint-
water residue, finger grease, free cloths moistened with 70% ethyl or
dust, and lint, are on the 70% isopropyl alcohol and completely
electrical contacts. dry them. After drying them, connect
the endoscope to the light source.
If the error message appears again,
contact Olympus.
E217 Scope data ERR The memory chip in the Stop using the endoscope and contact
Contact Olympus. endoscope is damaged. Olympus.
E218 Scope ERR The endoscope is damaged. Stop using the endoscope and contact
Contact Olympus. Olympus.
E220 Improper LINK device connection The equipment connected to Reconnect the equipment.
Confirm connections among LINK the LINK connector is
devices. connected incorrectly.
E301 Peripheral ERR A device whose image cannot Disconnect the device.
Unsupported peripheral. be displayed correctly is
connected.
E302 Internal buffer FULL The internal buffer is full of Transfer the data as described in
Send untransfer images. image data that has not been “ Transferring the internal buffer
transferred. folder” on page 241.
E303 Portable memory format ERR The portable memory cannot Format the portable memory again as
A15 Format memory again. be formatted. described in “ Formatting the portable
memory” on page 227.
If the portable memory still cannot be
formatted, replace it with a new one.
E304 Portable memory access ERR Communications with the Reinsert the portable memory and
A11 Confirm memory status. portable memory have been confirm the communication state.
A72 interrupted.

E307 Portable memory read ERR Communications with the Reinsert the portable memory and
A18 Confirm memory status. portable memory have been confirm the communication state.
A32 interrupted.

A37
A38

Ch.9 A44-
A46
A55
A56
A69
A70
A94
E308 Portable memory not connected. The portable memory is not Insert the portable memory into the
A13 Connect memory. inserted. portable memory port.

296 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Code Error message Possible cause Solution


E310 Clock ERR The internal clock has broken. Set the date and time as described in
Set date and time. “ “Date/comment” tab” on page 80
Also,contact Olympus.
E311 WHT BAL incomplete. The white balance has not Set the white balance as described in
Adjust WHT BAL. been set. Section 6.5, “White balance
adjustment” on page 175.
E315 Scope ERR Foreign objects, such as Wipe the electrical contacts on the
Unsupported scope. detergent remnants, hard endoscope connector using clean lint-
water residue, finger grease, free cloths moistened with 70% ethyl or
dust, and lint, are on the 70% isopropyl alcohol and completely
electrical contacts. dry them. After drying them, connect
the endoscope to the light source.
If the error message appears again,
contact Olympus.
The endoscope is Connect the endoscope shown in
incompatible with the video “ System chart” on page 303.
system center, or the video When the endoscope is shown, do not
system center or endoscope use it and contact Olympus.
malfunctions.
E800 Improper patient data. Characters or symbols other Enter numeric data as described in
B34 Input numerical only. than Arabic numerals have “ New registering and editing patient
been entered to "D.O.B". data” on page 263.
E801 Patient data exceeds range Characters or symbols other Enter data within the correct data
B45 Input correct range. than Arabic numerals have range as described in “ New
been entered to "D.O.B". registering and editing patient data” on
page 263.
E917 No patient ID The patient data is not entered Enter the correct data as described in
Confirm the patient data. in the required items. “ New registering and editing patient
data” on page 263.
E925 Observation mode not supported The connected endoscope Confirm the compatible observation
Confirm scope type. has selected an incompatible mode as described in “ Confirming
observation mode when the the available observation mode” on
xenon light source (CLV-S190, page 160.
CLV-S40Pro).
The endoscope is Use an endoscope compatible with the
incompatible with the optical- optical-digital observation mode.
Ch.9
digital observation mode.
E926 Observation mode not supported The light source has selected Confirm the compatible observation
Confirm CLV type. an incompatible observation mode as described in “ Confirming
mode when the xenon light the available observation mode” on
source (CLV-S190, CLV- page 160.
S40Pro).
The light source is Use a light source compatible with the
incompatible with the optical- optical-digital observation mode.
digital observation mode.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 297


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Code Error message Possible cause Solution


E931 WHT BAL failed The white balance adjustment Readjust the white balance.
Please retry. has not completed normally.
E934 Release limit exceeded Captured images for an Press the “EXAM END” key and record
Image data not captured. examination have reached an the images with a new ID.
upper limit.
E935 Buffer FULL A series of releasing at once Release again after a while.
Please wait and retry. has reached an upper limited.
E945 Portable memory FULL The free space in the portable Free up space by transferring the data
A07 Confirm capacity. memory is full. in the portable memory or use a new
B09 portable memory.

E947 Portable memory access ERR Communications with the Reinsert the portable memory and
Confirm memory status. portable memory have been confirm the communication state.
interrupted.
E948 Checking Internal buffer The release function has been Release again after a while.
Please wait and retry. operated while checking the
memory of internal buffer.

A14 No internal buffer found. The internal buffer of the video Stop using the endoscope and contact
Contact Olympus system center cannot be Olympus.
recognized.
A22 User name has not been entered. The user name has not been Enter the user name as described in
entered. “ Editing and new registering the user
settings” on page 92.
A33- Data deletion has failed. Communications with the Reinsert the portable memory and
A36 endoscope have been confirm the communication state.
A42 interrupted.

A43
A39- Data saving has failed. Communications with the Reinsert the portable memory and
A41 endoscope have been confirm the communication state.
interrupted.
A59 ID has not been entered. Next registration is attempted Set the user ID as described in
to be performed without “ Editing and new registering the user
entering the security ID. ID” on page 142.
A60 Overlapping ID. The security ID is overlapping. Set the user ID newly as described in
“ Editing and new registering the user
Ch.9 ID” on page 142.
A61 Password mismatch. The confirmation password is Input the correct password as
wrong. described in “ Editing and new
registering the user ID” on page 142.
A66 No corresponding exam image There are no images of the Select the examination having image
found in internal buffer. selected examination in the data as described in “ Basic
internal buffer. operation on thumbnail screen” on
page 231.

298 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Code Error message Possible cause Solution


A67 No corresponding exam image There are no images of the Select the examination having image
found in portable memory. selected examination in the data as described in “ Basic
portable memory. operation on thumbnail screen” on
page 231.
A76 Reading of scope ID data has Loading the data to be shown Close the endoscope information
failed. in the endoscope information window and display it again.
window has failed.
A77 Writing of scope ID data has Saving the data registered and Save the data again. If it still cannot be
failed. edited in the endoscope saved, contact Olympus.
information window has failed.
A78 Portable memory access error. The portable memory is Reinsert the portable memory and
removed while accessing to confirm the communication state.
the portable memory.
A92 Transferring image data. Please Any operation is performed on Perform operations on the thumbnail
wait. the thumbnail screen while screen after a while.
saving images to the internal
buffer.
A93 Due to the insufficient capacity of The internal buffer is full of Transfer the data as described in
internal buffer, saving has failed. image data that has not been “ Transferring the internal buffer
transferred. folder” on page 241.
A96- Data deletion has failed. The circuits around the Stop using the endoscope and contact
A98 internal buffer is damaged. Olympus.
B03
B04
B01 Data saving has failed. The circuits around the Stop using the endoscope and contact
B02 internal buffer is damaged. Olympus.

B25 Set HDTV release time shorter Release time for HDTV screen Set them correctly as described in
than SDTV. is set to longer than release “ “Release time H” tab” on page 86
time for SDTV screen. and “ “Release time S” tab” on
page 87.
B30 Scope communication ERR Foreign objects, such as Wipe the electrical contacts on the
Contact Olympus detergent remnants, hard endoscope connector using clean lint-
water residue, finger grease, free cloths moistened with 70% ethyl or
dust, and lint, are on the 70% isopropyl alcohol and completely
electrical contacts. dry them. After drying them, connect
the endoscope to the light source.
Ch.9
If the error message appears again,
contact Olympus.
The video system center Stop using the endoscope and contact
cannot communicate with the Olympus.
endoscope.
B31 Scope communication ERR The video system center Stop using the endoscope and contact
Contact Olympus cannot communicate with the Olympus.
endoscope.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 299


9.2 Troubleshooting guide

Code Error message Possible cause Solution


B32 Scope data ERR The endoscope is damaged. Stop using the endoscope and contact
Contact Olympus Olympus.
B33 Scope data ERR The endoscope is damaged. Stop using the endoscope and contact
Contact Olympus Olympus.
B40 OTV malfunction The video system center is Stop using the endoscope and contact
Contact Olympus damaged. Olympus.
B42 Turn ON a electronic shutter When using a light source Set the electronic shutter function to
setup. other than ones shown in "ON" as described in “ “Color/Bright.”
Table 7.4, the exposure is tab” on page 112.
attempted to be adjusted
without setting the electronic
shutter function to "ON".

NOTE
An error message could be deleted temporary by pressing the “ESC” key on the
keyboard. However, the error is not solved.

Ch.9

300 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


9.3 Returning the video system center for repair

9.3 Returning the video system center for repair

CAUTION
• Olympus is not liable for any injury or damage which occurs as a result of repairs
attempted by non-Olympus personnel.
• Before returning the video system center for repair, perform the following.
(1) Saving the following to the portable memory.
• system setup (refer to “ Saving the system setup to the portable memory” on
page 77).
• user settings (refer to “ Saving the user settings to the portable memory” on
page 97).
• user ID (refer to “ Saving the user ID to the portable memory” on page 145).
• unsent images (refer to “ Transferring the internal buffer folder” on page 241).
• patient data (refer to “ Saving patient data to the portable memory” on
page 268).
(2) System reset (refer to “ System reset” on page 281).
• System reset is deleted all images in the internal buffer of video system center,
and the internal buffer is reset to the default setting.They cannot be restored.Be
sure to follow the above steps.
• Protection of personal information in the case of Olympus when there is
information that applies to personal information to the product that you
entrusted to us by, and then delete.

When returning the video system center for repair, contact Olympus. With the video system center,
include a description of the malfunction or damage and the name and telephone number of the
individual at your location who is most familiar with the problem. Include a repair purchase order.

Ch.9

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 301


9.3 Returning the video system center for repair

Ch.9

302 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Combination equipment

Appendix

Combination equipment

 System chart

The recommended combinations of equipment that can be used with this video system center are
listed below. New products released after the introduction of the video system center may also be
compatible for use in combination with it. For further details, contact Olympus.

WARNING
If combinations of equipment other than those shown below are used, the full
responsibility should be assumed by the medical treatment facility. Such
combinations do not only allow the equipment to manifest their full functionality but
may also imperil the safety of the patient and medical personnel. In addition, the
endurance of the video system center and ancillary equipment is not guaranteed.
Troubles caused in this case are not covered by free-of-charge repair. Be sure to
use the equipment in one of the recommended combinations.

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 303


Combination equipment

 System chart

Video adapter

Camera head*1
(OTV-S7H series)
Fiberscope

Light guide cable*1

Camera head*1
(CH-S190 series, OTV-S7ProH series,
OTV-S7H series)
Rigidscope

Rigidvideoscope
(A500A series, WA50A/L series)

Flexible videoscope
(ENF-V series, CYF-V series, HYF-V,
LTF-V series, LF-V, PEF-V, VEF-V,
URF-V, CHF-V)

*1 The OLYMPUS video system can be configured for cardiac applications


App. only when TYPE CF applied part (camera heads and light guide cables)
bearing the symbol are used.

304 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Combination equipment

High definition LCD monitor


(OEV261H, OEV191H)
High definition monitor
(OEV181H)
LCD monitor
(OEV191)
Foot switch Keyboard
(MAJ-1391) (MAJ-1921,
MAJ-1922,
MAJ-1924)

Color video printer


(UP-21MDP, UP-25MDP)

VISERA ELITE video system center


(OTV-S190)

DVR
(IMH-20, IMH-10, PDW-75MD,
Portable memory DVO-1000MDP)
(MAJ-1925)

VISERA ELITE Xenon light source


(CLV-S190)
VISERA Pro Xenon light source
(CLV-S40Pro)
EVIS EXERA II Xenon light source
(CLV-180)
VISERA Xenon light source
(CLV-S45, CLV-S40)

Mobile workstation App.


(WM-NP2, WM-NP1,
WM-WP1)

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 305


Specifications

Specifications

 Environment

Operation Ambient temperature 10 – 40C (50 – 104F)


environment Relative humidity 30 – 85% (without condensation)
Atmospheric 700 – 1060 hPa
pressure (0.7 – 1.1 kgf/cm2)
(10.2 – 15.4 psia)
Standard storage Ambient temperature 5 – 40C (41 – 104F)
environment (e.g. Relative humidity 10 – 90% (without condensation)
within the hospital)
Atmospheric 700 – 1060 hPa
Pressure (0.7 – 1.1 kgf/cm2)
(10.2 – 15.4 psia)
Transportation and Ambient temperature –25 to +70C (–13 to +158F)
storage environment Relative humidity 10 – 90%
Atmospheric
700 – 1060 hPa
pressure

App.

306 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Specifications

 Specifications

Power supply Voltage 220 – 240 V AC


Voltage fluctuation Within 10%
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Frequency
Within 1 Hz
fluctuation
Consumption electric
150 VA
power
Size Dimensions 370 (W) × 85 (H) × 455 (D) mm
Dimensions
375 (W) × 91 (H) × 489 (D) mm
(maximum)
Weight 8.8 kg
Classification Type of protection
(medical electrical against electric Class I
equipment) shock
Degree of protection
Depend on applied part See also applied part (camera head or
against electric
videoscope).
shock of applied part
Degree or protection The video system center should be kept away from flammable
against explosion gases.
Observation Analog Either RGB (1080/50I) or YPbPr (1080/50I) output can be
HDTV signal output selected.
Analog VBS composite (576/50I: PAL), Y/C (576/50I: PAL), YPbPr, and
SDTV signal output RGB(576/50I: PAL); simultaneous outputs possible.
Digital SDI (HD-SDI or SD-SDI)
signal output DVI (WUXGA, 1080P or SXGA can be selected)
White balance White balance adjustment is possible using the white balance
adjustment button on the front panel.
Standard color chart
A color bar chart can be displayed.
output
Color tone The following color tone adjustments are possible using the color
adjustment tone level adjustment button and color tone selector button on the
keyboard.
Red adjustment 8 steps
Blue adjustment 8 steps
Chroma App.
8 steps
adjustment
Automatic gain The image can be electrically amplified when the light is
control (AGC) inadequate due to the distal end of the endoscope being too far
from the object.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 307


Specifications

Observation Contrast The image contrast can be set to one of the following three modes
(N, H, L) using the “CONTRAST” key on the keyboard.
N (Normal) Normal image
The dark areas are darker and the bright
H (High)
areas are brighter than in the normal image.
The dark areas are brighter and bright areas
L (Low)
are darker than in the normal image.
Iris The auto iris modes can be selected using the “iris mode” switch
on the front panel.
The brightness is adjusted based on the
Auto brightest part of the central part and the
average brightness of the periphery part.
The brightness is adjusted based on the
Peak
brightest part of the endoscopic image.
The brightness is adjusted based on the
Average
average brightness of the endoscopic image.
Image enhancement Fine patterns or edges in the endoscopic images can be enhanced
setting electrically to increase the image sharpness.
Either the structural enhancement or edge enhancement can be
selected according to the user setup.
Structural Enhancement of contrast of the fine patterns
enhancement in the image.
Enhancement of edges of the endoscopic
Edge enhancement
image.
Switching the The enhancement level can be selected from 3 levels (OFF, 1, 2,
enhancement modes and 3) using the image enhancement mode button on the front
panel.
Image size selection The size of the endoscopic image can be changed using the
“IMAGE SIZE” key on the keyboard.
Freeze An endoscopic image is frozen using an endoscope or the
“FREEZE” key on the keyboard.
Pre-freezing The image with the least rainbow color is selected from the images
captured in the set time period before freeze operation and
displayed.
Optical-digital The optical-digital observation can be performed when using the
observation endoscope and light source compatible with each optical-digital
observation mode.
This is one of the optical-digital observations
NBI observation
App. using the narrow band observation light.
This is one of the optical-digital observations
PDD observation *1
using the blue light.
Fog free function When the compatible endoscope is connected to this instrument,
the fog free function can be used.
*1 This function may not be available in some areas.

308 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Specifications

Observation Endoscope’s remote The functions of the remote switches on the endoscope can set in
switches function the user settings.
Reset to defaults The following settings can be reset to their defaults using the rest
button on the front panel.
• Color tone
• Iris mode
• Image enhancement method
• Image enhancement level
• Optical-digital observation
• Image size
• Contrast
• The function of the custom switches
• User settings
• Freeze
• Release index
• Zoom
• Arrow pointer
• Characters on screen
• Exposure
• PIP/POP
Remote control The following ancillary equipment can be controlled (specified
models only).
• Monitor
• DVR
• Video printer

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 309


Specifications

Documentation Patient data The following data can be displayed on the monitor using the
keyboard.
• Patient ID No.
• Patient name
• Sex
• Age
• Date of birth
• Date of recording (time)
• Image frame No.
• Video recorder mode
• Display image setting
• Comments
Displaying the record The recording state of the following ancillary equipment can be
state displayed on the monitor.
• DVR
• Video printer
Displaying the image The following data can be displayed on the monitor.
information • Structure enhancement level
• Edge enhancement level
• Contrast
• Zoom ratio
Advance registration The following data of up to 50 patients can be entered prior to
of patient data surgery using the keyboard.
• Patient ID No.
• Patient name
• Sex and age
• Date of birth
Portable memory Media MAJ-1925 (Olympus).
Recording format TIFF: no compression
JPEG(1/5): approx. 1/5
JPEG(1/10): approx. 1/10
Number of recording TIFF: 227 images
images JPEG(1/5): 1024 images
JPEG(1/10): 2048 images
These are the standard number of images when generating the
images for HDTV and SDTV at once. The number of images
changes depending on settings and resolution.

App.

310 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Specifications

Memory backup User settings The data of up to 20 users can be entered prior using the
keyboard.
Memorization of The following settings are held in memory even after the video
selected setting system center is turned OFF.
• Color tone
• Iris mode
• Enhancement
• Image size
• White balance
Lithium battery Life: 5 years
Medical Devices Directive

This device complies with the requirements of Directive 93/42/EEC


concerning medical devices.
Classification: Class I
WEEE Directive

In accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste


Electrical and Electronic Equipment, this symbol indicates that the
product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, but
should be collected separately.

Refer to your local Olympus distributor for return and/or collection


systems available in your country.
EMC Applied standard IEC 60601-1-2: 2001
IEC 60601-1-2: 2007
IEC 60601-1-2: 2014
• This instrument complies with the EMC standard for medical
electrical equipment, edition 4 (IEC 60601-1-2: 2014).
When connecting to an instrument that complies with a previous
edition of the EMC standard for medical electrical equipment
edition, the EMC characteristics could be vulnerable.
• CISPR 11 of emission:
Group 1, Class B
Year of manufacture Indication The last digit of the year of manufacture is the second digit of the App.
serial number. In this example, the year is 2000.
Ex. 7012345 (serial number)

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 311


Specifications

UDI label Indication The UDI label is required by some countries’ regulations regarding
the identification of a medical device also known as Unique Device
Identification (UDI).
The following information is being coded in the 2-dimensional
barcode (GS1 Data Matrix):
- (01) 14-digit GS1 Global Trade Item Number;
- (11) 6-digit date of manufacture;
- (21) 7-digit serial number.

App.

312 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Default settings list

Default settings list

 System setup

Category Tab Setting item Initial setting value


System Date/comment Date format DD/MM/YYYY
Date -
Time -
Retain data OFF
Dafault -
Operation OTV power OFF ON
Scope removal ON
Record OFF
Record setting Record format JPEG(1/10)
Patient data OFF
Folder form DCF
Scope image(Recording image to memory) HD
Printer Check captured image OFF
Output format SDI output HDTV
DVI output 1080P
Monitor output HDTV(RGB)
Printer output HDTV(RGB)
Aspect ratio 16:9
NR NR ON
Release time H Memory 2
Printer 1
DF device 1
ENDOALPHA 2
Release time S Memory 2
Printer 1
DF device 1
ENDOALPHA 2
Connection setting - Type(Monitor) OEV261H
App.
Output select SDI1
Keyboard MAJ-1922
Lamp type Xenon
Type(Remote of the printer) None
Type(Remote of the digital filing system) None
Type(Remote of the DVR) None

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 313


Default settings list

 User settings
Category Tab Setting item Initial setting value
basic setup Release1 Memory ON
Printer OFF
DF device ON
Release2 Memory ON
Printer OFF
DF device ON
PIP/POP PIP/POP PIP
Retain state OFF
OEV261H SDI2
PIP position Lower left
Sub screen size Large
Enhancement WLI mode1 A1
WLI mode2 A3
WLI mode3 A5
NBI mode1 A1
NBI mode2 A3
NBI mode3 A5
Color/Bright. Contrast LOW
Elec.shutter ON
PDD gain PDD1
Color mode Mode1
Mode(Iris) Auto←→Peak
Iris area Mask
AGC ON
MAXgain +6
Observation1 Scan level 6
Invert display OFF
Preset PRESET E
Observation2 HD Small←→Large
SD Small←→Large
App. Display time 4 sec
No. of images 1 image
HD4:3 mode OFF

314 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Default settings list

Category Tab Setting item Initial setting value


switch presets Scope switch Switch1 Release1
Switch2 LIGHT
Switch3 Enhancement
Switch4 NBI
Front panel Button1 Enhancement
Button2 Iris
Keyboard A None
B None
C None
D None
Foot switch Switch1 Release 1
(Connect to OTV) Switch2 Release 2
Foot switch Switch1 Release 1
(Connect to light Switch2
Release 2
source)
OSD customization OSD Retain setting OFF
Start Exam. Retain settings
Partial mode Partial 1
Display time Always
Custom disp 1 Patient ID OFF
Patient name OFF
Sex OFF
Age OFF
DOB OFF
Date OFF
Time OFF
Comment OFF
Custom disp 2 D.F OFF
CVP OFF
Memory OFF
Custom disp 3 Enhance level OFF
Color mode OFF
Ob. mode OFF
Orientation OFF App.
Color tone - R 0
B 0
C 0

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 315


Default settings list

 Security settings for administrators


Category Tab Setting item Initial setting value
- Account Account None
User Log-off timing OTV power-off
Individual ID Disable
General password common
Confirm general password common
Initialize general password -
Target menu Patient menu Protect
View image Protect
User setting/color tone Protect
System setup Protect
Scope information Protect
Admin Log-off time OTV Power OFF
Admin password admin
Confirm admin password admin

App.

316 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Multilingual typing by the keyboard

Multilingual typing by the keyboard

Multi language can be typed when using the keyboard (MAJ-1922).

 When not using the dead key


Press an alphabet key with the “Shift”, “Ctrl”, or “AltGr” key on the keyboard: the accented
character on the key is typed.

+ Shift + AltGr
Additionally pressing the “Shift” key changes the
character to uppercase.

None + Ctrl
Additionally pressing the “Shift” key changes the
character to uppercase.

NOTE
The “Alt” key or “Ctrl” key can be used for the “AltGr” key.

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 317


Multilingual typing by the keyboard

 When using the dead key

1 Type a diacritical mark using a dead key.

Diacritical mark Key operation


“2” key + “Shift” key
“3” key + “Shift” key
“4” key + “Shift” key
“5” key + “Shift” key
“6” key + “Shift” key
“ ] ” key
“ ] ” key + “Shift” key
“ [ ” key + “Shift” key

2 Press an alphabet key: an accented character is displayed.

App.

318 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Security

Security

This video system center has the security function. There are two categories for security level: the
administrator authority and the general user authority, and the available functions are different in each
category. More details are shown below.

 Security level

 General user authority


• Changing the password of general user
• Displaying the accessible screens
• Changing the settings on the accessible screens

 Administrator authority
• Registering the general user IDs
• Initializing the general user IDs
• Setting and initializing the common password
• Security settings
 Enabling or disabling the security function
 Locking the screens
 Setting the log off trigger
• Operating all functions available in the general user authority

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 319


EMC information

EMC information

 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration — Electromagnetic


emissions
This model is intended for use by medical personnel in hospital environments and for use in the
electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of this model should
assure that it is used in such an environment.

Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment — Guidance


RF emissions Group 1 This instrument uses RF (Radio Frequency) energy only for its
CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not
likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
Radiated emissions Class B This instrument’s RF emissions are very low and are not likely to
CISPR 11 cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
Main terminal
conducted emissions
CISPR 11
Harmonic emissions Class A This instrument’s harmonic emissions are low and are not likely to
IEC 61000-3-2 cause any problem in the typical commercial power supply connected
to this instrument.
Voltage Complies This instrument stabilizes its own radio variability and has no effect
fluctuations/flicker such as flicker in lighting apparatus.
emissions
IEC 61000-3-3

App.

320 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


EMC information

 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration — Electromagnetic


immunity
This model is intended for use by medical personnel in hospital environments and for use in the
electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of this model should
assure that it is used in such an environment.
This instrument can be used with the high-frequency electrosurgical equipment that designated
by Olympus.

IEC 60601-1-2 IEC 60601-1-2 IEC 60601-1-2 (2007, 2001)


Compliance
Immunity test (2014) (2007, 2001) Electromagnetic
level
test level test level environment — Guidance
Electrostatic Contact: Contact: Same as left Floors should be made of wood,
discharge (ESD) 8 kV 2, 4, 6 kV concrete, or ceramic tile that
IEC 61000-4-2 Air: Air: hardly produces static. If floors
2, 4, 8, 15 kV 2, 4, 8 kV are covered with synthetic
material that tends to produce
static, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast 2 kV 2 kV Same as left Mains power quality should be
transient/burst for power supply lines for power supply that of a typical commercial
IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV lines (original condition feeding the
for input/output lines 1 kV facilities) or hospital
for input/output environment.
lines
Surge Differential mode: Differential mode: Same as left Mains power quality should be
IEC 61000-4-5 0.5, 1 kV 0.5, 1 kV that of a typical commercial or
Common mode: Common mode: hospital environment.
0.5, 1, 2 kV 0.5, 1, 2 kV
for signal input/
output lines: 2 kV

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 321


EMC information

IEC 60601-1-2 IEC 60601-1-2 IEC 60601-1-2 (2007, 2001)


Compliance
Immunity test (2014) (2007, 2001) Electromagnetic
level
test level test level environment — Guidance
Voltage dips, short 0% UT < 5% UT Same as left Mains power quality should be
interruptions, and (100% dip in UT) (> 95% dip in UT) that of a typical commercial or
voltage variations for 0.5 cycle/1 cycle for 0.5 cycle hospital environment. If the user
on power supply – 40% UT of this instrument requires
input lines (60% dip in UT) continued operation during
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycle power mains interruptions, it is
recommended that this
70% UT 70% UT
instrument be powered from an
(30% dip in UT) (30% dip in UT)
uninterruptible power supply or a
for 25 cycle (50 Hz)/ for 25 cycle
battery.
30 cycle (60 Hz)
Phase angle causing
voltage dips: 0
0% UT < 5% UT
(100% dip in UT) (> 95% dip in UT)
for 250 cycle (50 Hz)/ for 5 seconds
300 cycle (60 Hz)
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Power frequency 30 A/m 3 A/m Same as left It is recommended to use this
(50/60 Hz) (50 Hz or 60 Hz) (50 Hz, 60 Hz) instrument by maintaining
magnetic field enough distance from any
IEC 61000-4-8 equipment that operates with
high current.

App.

322 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


EMC information

IEC 60601-1-2 IEC 60601-1-2 IEC 60601-1-2 (2007, 2001)


Immunity Compliance
(2014) (2007, 2001) Electromagnetic environment —
test level
test level test level Guidance
Conducted RF 3V 3V (V1) Same as left Recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-6 (150 kHz – (150 kHz –
3,5
80 MHz) 80 MHz) d = ------- P
V1
6V – Same as left
(ISM band of Where “P” is the maximum output power
150 kHz – rating of the transmitter in watts [W]
80 MHz) according to the transmitter manufacturer
and “d” is the recommended separation
distance in meters [m].
ISM (industry, science, and medical care) band of 6.765 MHz – 6.795 MHz, 13.553 MHz –
13.567 MHz, 26.957 MHz – 27.283 MHz, and 40.66 MHz – 40.70 MHz between 0.15 MHz and
80 MHz
Radiated RF 3V/m (80 MHz – 3V/m (E1) Same as left Recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-3 2.7 GHz) (80 MHz –
3,5
2.5 GHz) d = ------- P
E1
Proximity Refer to the table – Same as left 80 MHz – 800 MHz
magnetic field of the next page. 7
from RF d = ------ P
E1
communication 800 MHz – 2.5 GHz
equipment Where “P” is the maximum output power
IEC 61000-4-3 rating of the transmitter in watts [W]
according to the transmitter manufacturer
and “d” is the recommended separation
distance in meters [m].

NOTE
• At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
• These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
• Electromagnetic interference may occur in the vicinity of high-frequency
electrosurgical equipment and/or other equipment marked with the following
symbol:

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 323


EMC information

NOTE
• Field strength from fixed RF transmitters as determined by an electromagnetic site
surveya) should be less than the compliance level in each frequency rangeb).

a) Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio
(cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM
and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically
with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the
measured field strength in the location in which this model is used exceeds
the applicable RF compliance level above, this model should be observed to
verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating this model.
b) Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less
than 3 V/m.

App.

324 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


EMC information

Test frequency Maximum power Immunity test


Band [MHz] Modulation*1
[MHz] [W] level [V/m]
Pulse modulation*1
385 380 – 390 1.8 27
18 Hz
FM 5 kHz
450 430 – 470 2 28
deviation 1 kHz sine
710
Pulse modulation*1
745 704 – 787 0.2 9
217 Hz
780
810
Pulse modulation*1
870 800 – 960 2 28
18 Hz
930
1720
Pulse modulation*1
1845 1700 – 1990 2 28
217 Hz
1970
Pulse modulation*1
2450 2400 – 2570 2 28
217 Hz
5240
Pulse modulation*1
5500 5100 – 5800 0.2 9
217 Hz
5785

*1 The carrier shall be modulated using a 50% duty cycle square wave signal.

WARNING
Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as antenna
cables and external antennas) should be used no closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to
any part of this instrument, including cables specified by Olympus. Otherwise,
degradation of the performance of this equipment could result.

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 325


License information of Open Source Software

License information of Open Source Software

 GNU GPL

This product uses software modules licensed under the terms of the GNU GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE (“GPL”).
Please see the following table for the software module made the target.

Software modules
End User License Agreement of software modules
concerned
libgcc GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 with Exception
libstdc++

This section must not be translated into any language and must not be changed from its original text.
According to the license agreement of this open source software, the license description must be
written in English.

 Others

• This product contains software modules which are not licensed under the terms of GPL
and.This section must not be translated into any language and must not be changed from its
original text. According to the license agreement of this open source software, the license
description must be written in English.
• The Licensed Software may include (i) some open source software and (ii) other third party
software (collectively, “Third Party Software”). Regarding the use of the Third Party Software,
you shall follow the license terms and conditions applied to such Third Party Software. Any
part of this License Agreement does not restrict, change or alter any of your rights and
obligations imposed by the license terms and conditions of the Third Party Software.

App.

326 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

End User License Agreement of Open Source


Software modules

 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 with


Exception

About libgcc and libstdc++, those are licensed under the terms of the GNU GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 with special exception or additional permission to show in the following.

a) libstdc++
The libstdc++ source code is distributed under the GNU General Public License version 2, with
the so-called “Runtime Exception” as follows (or see any header or implementation file).
As a special exception, you may use this file as part of a free software library without restriction.
Specifically, if other files instantiate templates or use macros or inline functions from this file, or
you compile this file and link it with other files to produce an executable, this file does not by
itself cause the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public License. This
exception does not however invalidate any other reasons why the executable file might be
covered by the GNU General Public License.

b) libgcc
GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
your option) any later version.

In addition to the permissions in the GNU General Public License, the Free Software Foundation
gives you unlimited permission to link the compiled version of this file into combinations with
other programs, and to distribute those combinations without any restriction coming from the
use of this file. (The General Public License restrictions do apply in other respects; for example,
they cover modification of the file, and distribution when not linked into a combined executable.)
GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 327


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

 newlib

This product uses the open source software program “newlib” which applies the terms and conditions
provided by owner of the copyright to the “newlib”.

The newlib subdirectory is a collection of software from several sources.


Each file may have its own copyright/license that is embedded in the source file.

(1) University of California, Berkeley


[1a]
Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright
notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the
University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

[1b]
Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright
notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising
materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was
developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

App. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

328 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

[1c]
Copyright (c) 1981, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of
California.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

[1d]
Copyright (c) 1988, 1990, 1993 Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.

App.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 329


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

[1e]
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
(c) UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein
with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
App. acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

330 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

[1f]
Copyright (c) 1987, 1988, 2000 Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that: (1) source distributions
retain this entire copyright notice and comment, and (2) distributions including binaries display the
following acknowledgement: “This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors” in the documentation or other materials provided with the distribution and
in all advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software. Neither the name of the
University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please note that in some of the above alternate licenses, there is a statement regarding that
acknowledgement must be made in any advertising materials for products using the code. This
restriction no longer applies due to the following license change:
ftp://ftp.cs.berkeley.edu/pub/4bsd/README.Impt.License.Change
In some cases the defunct clause has been removed in modified newlib code and in some cases,
the clause has been left as-is.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- App.

(3) David M. Gay at AT&T


The author of this software is David M. Gay.
Copyright (c) 1991 by AT&T.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 331


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby
granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a
copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such
software.

THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT&T MAKES ANY
REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF
THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

(4) Advanced Micro Devices


Copyright 1989, 1990 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.

This software is the property of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc (AMD) which specifically grants the user
the right to modify, use and distribute this software provided this notice is not removed or altered. All
other rights are reserved by AMD.

AMD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS
SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMD BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

So that all may benefit from your experience, please report any problems or suggestions about this
software to the 29K Technical Support Center at 800-29-29-AMD (800-292-9263) in the USA, or 0800-
89-1131 in the UK, or 0031-11-1129 in Japan, toll free. The direct dial number is 512-462-4118.

Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.


29K Support Products
Mail Stop 573
5900 E. Ben White Blvd.
Austin, TX 78741
800-292-9263

App. (5) C.W. Sandmann


Copyright (C) 1993 C.W. Sandmann

This file may be freely distributed as long as the author's name remains.

332 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

(6) Eric Backus


(C) Copyright 1992 Eric Backus

This software may be used freely so long as this copyright notice is left intact.
There is no warrantee on this software.

(7) Sun Microsystems


Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.


Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice
is preserved.

(8) Hewlett Packard


(c) Copyright 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY

To anyone who acknowledges that this file is provided “AS IS” without any express or implied warranty:
permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this file for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice and this notice appears in all copies, and that the name of
Hewlett-Packard Company not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any
purpose.

(9) Hans-Peter Nilsson


Copyright (C) 2001 Hans-Peter Nilsson

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that the above
copyright notice, this notice and the following disclaimer are preserved with no changes.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. App.

(11) Christopher G. Demetriou


Copyright (c) 2001 Christopher G. Demetriou
All rights reserved.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 333


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(12) SuperH, Inc.


Copyright 2002 SuperH, Inc. All rights reserved

This software is the property of SuperH, Inc (SuperH) which specifically grants the user the right to
modify, use and distribute this software provided this notice is not removed or altered. All other rights
are reserved by SuperH.

SUPERH MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO


THIS SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUPERH BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING FROM THE
FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

So that all may benefit from your experience, please report any problems or suggestions about this
App. software to the SuperH Support Center via e-mail at softwaresupport@superh.com.

334 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

SuperH, Inc.
405 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose
CA 95134
USA

(13) Royal Institute of Technology


Copyright (c) 1999 Kungliga Tekniska H skolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden).
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of KTH nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY KTH AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL KTH OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(14) Alexey Zelkin


Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 Alexey Zelkin <phantom@FreeBSD.org>
App.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 335


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(15) Andrey A. Chernov


Copyright (C) 1997 by Andrey A. Chernov, Moscow, Russia.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
App. OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

336 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

(16) FreeBSD
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 FreeBSD Project.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(17) S. L. Moshier
Author: S. L. Moshier.
Copyright (c) 1984,2000 S.L. Moshier

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby
granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a
copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such
software.

THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, THE AUTHOR MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR App.
ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 337


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

(18) Citrus Project


Copyright (c)1999 Citrus Project, All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(19) Todd C. Miller


Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com>
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

App. 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.

338 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(26) Mike Barcroft


Copyright (c) 2001 Mike Barcroft <mike@FreeBSD.org>
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

(27) Konstantin Chuguev (--enable-newlib-iconv)


App.
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 Konstantin Chuguev.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 339


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

iconv (Charset Conversion Library) v2.0

(27) Artem Bityuckiy (--enable-newlib-iconv)


Copyright (c) 2003, Artem B. Bityuckiy, SoftMine Corporation.
Rights transferred to Franklin Electronic Publishers.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
App. DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

340 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

(28) Red Hat Incorporated


Unless otherwise stated in each remaining newlib file, the remaining files in the newlib subdirectory
default to the following copyright. It should be noted that Red Hat Incorporated now owns copyrights
belonging to Cygnus Solutions and Cygnus Support.

Copyright (c) 1994, 1997, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Red Hat Incorporated.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL RED HAT INCORPORATED BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 341


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

 libgloss

This product uses the open source software program “libgloss” which applies the terms and conditions
provided by owner of the copyright to the “libgloss”.

The libgloss subdirectory is a collection of software from several sources.


Each have their own copyrights embedded in each file that they concern.

(1) University of California, Berkeley


[1a]
Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright
notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the
University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

[1b]
Copyright (c) 1991, 2000 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
App.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

342 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

[1c]
Copyright (c) 1991, 1998, 2001 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. [rescinded 22 July 1999]
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS App.
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 343


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please note that in some of the above alternate licenses, there is a statement regarding that
acknowledgement must be made in any advertising materials for products using the code. This
restriction no longer applies due to the following license change:
ftp://ftp.cs.berkeley.edu/pub/4bsd/README.Impt.License.Change
In some cases the defunct clause has been removed in modified newlib code and in some cases,
the clause has been left as-is.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(2) DJ Delorie
Copyright (C) 1993 DJ Delorie
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms is permitted provided that the above copyright notice
and following paragraph are duplicated in all such forms.

This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

(4) Advanced Micro Devices


Copyright 1989, 1990 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.

This software is the property of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc (AMD) which specifically grants the user
the right to modify, use and distribute this software provided this notice is not removed or altered. All
other rights are reserved by AMD.

AMD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS
SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMD BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

So that all may benefit from your experience, please report any problems or suggestions about this
software to the 29K Technical Support Center at 800-29-29-AMD (800-292-9263) in the USA, or 0800-
App. 89-1131 in the UK, or 0031-11-1129 in Japan, toll free. The direct dial number is 512-462-4118.

344 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.


29K Support Products
Mail Stop 573
5900 E. Ben White Blvd.
Austin, TX 78741
800-292-9263

(7) Sun Microsystems


Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.


Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice
is preserved.

(8) Hewlett Packard


(c) Copyright 1986 HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY

To anyone who acknowledges that this file is provided “AS IS” without any express or implied warranty:
permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this file for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice and this notice appears in all copies, and that the name of
Hewlett-Packard Company not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose.

(9) Hans-Peter Nilsson


Copyright (C) 2001 Hans-Peter Nilsson

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that the above
copyright notice, this notice and the following disclaimer are preserved with no changes.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. App.

(10) No Copyright
THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT COPYRIGHTED

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 345


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

(11) Cygnus Support / Cygnus Solutions


Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Cygnus Support

The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this software and its
documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and
that this notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is
required for any of the authorized uses. Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their
authors and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that the new terms are
clearly indicated on the first page of each file where they apply.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please note that the copyright above may be used with the name Cygnus Solutions instead of Cygnus
Support. Both names should be considered interchangeable. These copyrights are now owned by Red
Hat Incorporated.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(12) Red Hat Incorporated


Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Red Hat, Inc.

The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this software and its
documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and
that this notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is
required for any of the authorized uses. Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their
authors and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that the new terms are
clearly indicated on the first page of each file where they apply.

(13) Default copyright


Unless otherwise stated in each remaining libgloss file, the remaining files in the libgloss subdirectory
are governed by the following copyright.

Copyright (c) 1994, 1997, 2001, 2002 Red Hat Incorporated.


All rights reserved.

App. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

346 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

The name of Red Hat Incorporated may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL RED HAT INCORPORATED BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 347


End User License Agreement of Open Source Software modules

App.

348 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Index

Index

A Exposure area ................................................ 195

AGC .................................................................... 5 F
Annotation images
FLIP ................................................................ 261
Generating ................................................ 238
Arrow pointer Foot switch...................................................... 120
Function Operation Panel menu ............... 213 Freeze......................................................... 5, 204
Keyboard................................................... 211 Front panel....................................................... 118
Automatic brightness adjustment........................ 4 Function Operation Panel menu ..................... 282

B H
Brightness ....................................................... 191 HDTV .................................................................. 5

C I
Camera head ...................................................... 4 Image enhancement ....................................... 198
Care ................................................................ 285 Image files and folders.................................... 243
Character input ....................................... 278, 284 Image sensor (CCD)........................................... 4
Color adjustment................................................. 4 Image size ...................................................... 205
Color tone adjustment..................................... 201 Image source .................................................. 260
Combination equipment .................................. 303 Images in the portable memory ...................... 249
Contrast mode ................................................ 199 Inspection work flow ....................................... 152
Cursor Installation
Function Operation Panel menu ............... 208 Another location.......................................... 39
Keyboard................................................... 208 Mobile workstation ...................................... 38
Custom disp 1 ................................................. 126 Installation work flow......................................... 36
Custom disp 2 ................................................. 127 Iris ....................................................................... 4
Custom disp 3 ................................................. 128 Iris mode ......................................................... 190
Custom switch............................................. 6, 121 Isolation transformer ........................................... 4

D K
Default settings list.......................................... 313 Keyboard ................................................. 119, 317
Disposal .......................................................... 286
L
E Light source ........................................................ 4
Edge enhancement............................................. 5 CLV-S190, CLV-S40Pro.............................. 41
Electronic shutter ........................................ 4, 196 CLV-S45, CLV-S40 ..................................... 42
Compatible light sources ............................ 40 App.
Electronic zoom .............................................. 203
EMC information ............................................. 320 M
Endoscope
Fiberscope and camera head ................... 171 Mobile workstation ...................................... 66, 67
Rigidscope and camera head ................... 172 Monitor
VISERA series videoscope ....................... 170 Compatible monitors................................... 44
Endoscope information window ...................... 209 OEV181H ................................................... 50
Exposure ......................................................... 193 OEV191 ...................................................... 52

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 349


Index

OEV191H.................................................... 46 Remote controlling


OEV261H.................................................... 44 Monitor...................................................... 257
Video printer ............................................. 254
N Video recorder (DVR) ............................... 251
NBI observation .......................................... 6, 161 Reset .............................................................. 276
Function Operation Panel menu ............... 217
S
Keyboard .................................................. 216
Noise reduction ............................................... 200 SDTV .................................................................. 5
Nomenclature and Functions Security........................................................... 319
Front panel.................................................. 21 Security settings ............................................. 130
Keyboard .................................................... 24 Setup list ........................................................... 71
Monitor ........................................................ 32 Specifications.................................................. 306
Rear panel .................................................. 22 Storage ........................................................... 286
Side panels ................................................. 30 Structure enhancement ...................................... 5
Symbols and descriptions ........................... 19
System reset................................................... 281
Normal light observation (WLI) ........................... 6
System setup
O Displaying ................................................... 72
Editing......................................................... 75
Observation mode........................................... 215 Loading from the portable memory............. 78
Operation flow................................................. 167 Saving to the portable memory................... 77
Optical-digital observation........................... 6, 216 System setup (connection setting).................... 88
OSD ................................................................ 124
T
P
Target menu.................................................... 136
Package contents ............................................. 17 Termination ..................................................... 186
Password ........................................................ 148 Troubleshooting .............................................. 287
Patient data Troubleshooting guide .................................... 288
Calling ....................................................... 267 Two screens display ....................................... 257
Deleting..................................................... 265
Editing ....................................................... 184 U
Entering .................................................... 182
User ................................................................ 135
Loading from portable memory ................. 271
User ID
New registering ......................................... 263
Deleting .................................................... 144
Saving to the portable memory ................. 268
Displaying ................................................. 138
PDD observation......................................... 6, 162
Editing....................................................... 142
Function Operation Panel menu ............... 220
Loading from the portable memory........... 146
Keyboard .................................................. 219
Saving to the portable memory................. 145
PIP .............................................................. 5, 257
User settings
POP ............................................................ 5, 259
Deleting ...................................................... 96
Portable memory......................................... 5, 249
Displaying ................................................... 90
App. Checking ................................................... 228 Editing......................................................... 92
Formatting................................................. 227 Loading from the portable memory........... 100
Insertiing ................................................... 225 Saving to the portable memory................... 97
Removing.................................................. 226 User settings (Color tone)............................... 129
R V
Release............................................................... 5 Video monitor display ..................................... 154
Remaining capacity indicator .......................... 229 Video printer ....................................................... 4

350 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


Index

Compatible video printers ........................... 62


Video recorder (DVR)
Compatible video recorders ........................ 55
Controlling by the menu list....................... 251
Controlling from the custom switch ........... 252
Controlling from the keyboard................... 252
IMH-10 ........................................................ 58
IMH-20 ........................................................ 56
Other DVRs................................................. 60

W
Wall mains outlet................................................. 4
Wash out ............................................................. 5
White balance adjustment............................... 175

App.

OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 351


Index

App.

352 OTV-S190 INSTRUCTION MANUAL


©2011 OLYMPUS MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORP. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed without the
express written permission of OLYMPUS MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORP.

OLYMPUS is a registered trademark of OLYMPUS CORPORATION.

Trademarks, product names, logos, or trade names used in this


document are generally registered trademarks or trademarks of each
company.
Manufactured by

2951 Ishikawa-cho, Hachioji-shi, Tokyo 192-8507, Japan


Fax: (042)646-2429 Telephone: (042)642-2111

Distributed by

3500 Corporate Parkway, P.O. Box 610, Center Valley, PA


18034-0610, U.S.A.
Fax: (484)896-7128 Telephone: (484)896-5000

5301 Blue Lagoon Drive, Suite 290 Miami, FL 33126-2097, U.S.A.


Fax: (305)261-4421 Telephone: (305)266-2332

(Premises/Goods delivery) Wendenstrasse 14-18, 20097 Hamburg, Germany


(Letters) Postfach 10 49 08, 20034 Hamburg, Germany
Fax: (040)23773-4656 Telephone: (040)23773-0

KeyMed House, Stock Road, Southend-on-Sea, Essex SS2 5QH, United Kingdom
Fax: (01702)465677 Telephone: (01702)616333

117071, Moscow, Malaya Kaluzhskaya 19, bld. 1, fl.2, Russia


Fax: (095)958-2277 Telephone: (095)958-2245

A8F, Ping An International Financial Center, No. 1-3, Xinyuan South Road,
Chaoyang District, Beijing, 100027 P.R.C.
Fax: (86)10-5976-1299 Telephone: (86)10-5819-9000

Olympus Tower 9F, 446, Bongeunsa-ro, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, Korea 135-509


Fax: (02)6255-3494 Telephone: (02)6255-3210

491B, River Valley Road #12-01/04, Valley Point Office Tower, Singapore 248373
Fax: 6834-2438 Telephone: 6834-0010

3 Acacia Place, Notting Hill, VIC 3168, Australia


Fax: (03)9543-1350 Telephone: (03)9265-5400

GT7168 20 Printed in Japan 20191003 *0000

You might also like